Océ
VarioLink 2221
VarioLink 2821
VarioLink 3621
The road to
efficiency
User’s Guide
Copy Operations
Meter Reading Overview
If your monthly Océ invoices are calculated based on your product usage. You can help ensure accurate billing by providing us
with accurate meter reads every month.
Please use the Océ “E-Z Reading” web site to enter your monthly
readings. We can even set you up to receive a monthly e-mail
reminder. Go to www.oceusa.com and click on Meter Reads.
You may also enter your readings by phone by calling 800-945-9708.
Viewing the Counters (Meter Count)
For more information, see Chapter 10 of the User’s Guide - Copy Operations
Access
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
Proof Copy
Mode Memory
Utility/
Counter
1657
Start
114
Mode Check
35
Main Power
1
Press Utility/Counter
on the control panel
2
Record the Total Counter
readings and enter them on the
Océ “E-Z Reading” web site.
(See www.oceusa.com)
Introduction
Introduction
Thank you for choosing this machine.
This User’s Guide contains details on the operation of the various functions
of the VarioLink 2221, 2821 and 3621, precautions on its use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read this User’s Guide before using the machine.
After reading the User’s Guide, store it in the designated holder so that it can
easily be referred to when questions or problems arise during operation.
Views of the actual equipment may be slightly different from the illustrations
used in this User’s Guide.
Energy Star®
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets
the ENERGY STAR® Guidelines for energy efficiency.
What is an ENERGY STAR® Product?
An ENERGY STAR® product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY
STAR® product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills
and helps protect the environment.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-1
Introduction
Trademarks and registered trademarks
Netscape Communications, the Netscape Communications logo, Netscape
Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and Netscape are trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.
Compact-VJE
Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp.
RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
RSA® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA
BSAFE® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
License information
This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software
from RSA Security Inc.
OpenSSL Statement
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor
may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
x-2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code
found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just
the SSL code.
The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young
should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This
can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-3
Introduction
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public
Licence.]
All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies
x-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
Contents
Introduction
Energy Star® ..................................................................................... x-1
What is an ENERGY STAR® Product? ............................................x-1
Trademarks and registered trademarks ......................................... x-2
Contents ............................................................................................ x-5
Available features ........................................................................... x-16
Automatically selecting the paper .................................................x-16
Adjusting copies to the size of the paper .....................................x-16
Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios ..............x-16
Scanning the document in separate batches ...............................x-16
Sorting copies ...............................................................................x-16
Stapling copies .............................................................................x-17
Punching holes in copies ..............................................................x-17
Center binding ...............................................................................x-17
Copying multiple document pages onto a single page ................x-18
Copying a document containing pages of various sizes ..............x-18
Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original ...x-18
Adding a cover page .....................................................................x-18
Adding insertions, such as colored paper, within copies .............x-19
Inserting paper (interleaves) between copies of overhead
projector transparencies ...............................................................x-19
Adding a binding margin to copies ...............................................x-19
Erasing sections of copies ............................................................x-20
Repeating copy images ................................................................x-20
Separately copying a page spread ...............................................x-20
Copying with a layout of a book or magazine ...............................x-20
Printing distribution numbers and stamps ....................................x-21
Printing copies overlapping a different image ..............................x-21
Copying with black and white reversed ........................................x-21
Checking copy jobs ......................................................................x-21
Programming copy settings ..........................................................x-21
Checking the copy settings ..........................................................x-21
Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens .........................x-22
Interrupting a copy job ..................................................................x-22
Printing a proof copy .....................................................................x-22
Saving copy documents ...............................................................x-22
Explanation of manual conventions .............................................. x-23
User’s Guides .................................................................................. x-25
User’s Guide [Copy Operations] (this manual) ..............................x-25
User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations] ................................x-25
User’s Guide [Box Operations] .....................................................x-25
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-5
Introduction
User’s Guide [Print Operations] ....................................................x-25
Quick Guide [Print Operations] .....................................................x-25
User’s Guide [Advanced Scan Operations] ..................................x-25
User’s Guide [Facsimile Operations] ............................................x-26
User’s Guide [Fax Driver Operations] ...........................................x-26
Descriptions and symbols for documents and paper ..................x-27
“Width” and “Length” ...................................................................x-27
Paper orientation ..........................................................................x-27
Legal restrictions on copying .........................................................x-29
1
x-6
Installation and operation precautions
1.1
Safety information .............................................................................1-2
Warning and precaution symbols ...................................................1-2
Meaning of symbols ........................................................................1-2
1.2
USER INSTRUCTIONS ......................................................................1-9
FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES
(For U.S.A. Users) ...........................................................................1-9
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD
(ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users) ........................................1-9
For users in countries subject to Class B regulations ....................1-9
For users in countries not subject to Class B regulations ..............1-9
1.3
Laser safety ......................................................................................1-10
Internal laser radiation ..................................................................1-10
CDRH regulation ...........................................................................1-11
For European users .......................................................................1-11
For Denmark users .......................................................................1-11
For Finland, Sweden users ...........................................................1-12
For Norway users ..........................................................................1-12
Laser safety label ..........................................................................1-13
Ozone release ...............................................................................1-13
Acoustic noise (For European users only) ....................................1-14
Notification for US only .................................................................1-14
For EU member states only ..........................................................1-14
For EU member states only ..........................................................1-15
1.4
Caution notations and labels ..........................................................1-16
1.5
Space requirements ........................................................................1-17
1.6
Operation precautions ....................................................................1-18
Power source ................................................................................1-18
Operating environment .................................................................1-18
Storage of copies ..........................................................................1-18
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
2
Before making copies
2.1
Part names and their functions ....................................................... 2-2
Options ........................................................................................... 2-2
Outside of machine ........................................................................ 2-5
Inside/back of main unit ................................................................. 2-7
Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF-620 .............................. 2-9
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-108/PC-206/PC-407 ............................. 2-10
Saddle Stitcher SD-507/Mailbin Kit MT-502 ................................ 2-11
Finisher FS-530/Output Tray OT-602/Punch Unit PU-501 .......... 2-12
Control panel ................................................................................ 2-14
Basic settings screen (Basics screen) ......................................... 2-17
Icons that appear in the screen ................................................... 2-18
Enlarging the touch panel screens ............................................... 2-19
2.2
Adjusting the angle of the control panel ...................................... 2-20
To adjust the angle of the control panel ...................................... 2-20
2.3
Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power ................... 2-22
To turn on the machine ................................................................ 2-22
To scan during warm-up .............................................................. 2-24
To turn off the machine ................................................................ 2-26
Automatically returning to the default settings
(Automatic panel reset) ................................................................ 2-27
Automatically returning to the screen given priority .................... 2-27
Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) .................. 2-28
Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) ........................... 2-28
Darkening the touch panel (LCD Back-Light Off) ........................ 2-29
Controlling machine use with user authentication
(machine authentication) .............................................................. 2-30
Controlling machine use with user authentication
(external server authentication) .................................................... 2-33
Limiting user access with account track ...................................... 2-37
Controlling machine use with user authentication
(external server authentication) and account track ...................... 2-40
Controlling machine use with user authentication
(machine authentication) and account track ................................ 2-45
Controlling machine use with user authentication
(machine authentication) and account track synchronized ......... 2-50
2.4
Loading paper into the 1st or 2nd tray ......................................... 2-54
To load paper (1st or 2nd tray) ..................................................... 2-54
2.5
Loading paper into the LCT ........................................................... 2-57
To load paper (LCT) ..................................................................... 2-57
2.6
Loading paper into the bypass tray .............................................. 2-60
To load paper (bypass tray) ......................................................... 2-60
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-7
Introduction
3
x-8
Basic copy operation
3.1
General copy operation ....................................................................3-2
To make a copy ..............................................................................3-2
3.2
Operations that cannot be combined ..............................................3-5
Operations where the setting specified last is given priority ..........3-5
Operations where the setting specified first is given priority ..........3-7
3.3
Feeding the document ......................................................................3-8
To load the document into the ADF ................................................3-8
To place the document on the original glass ................................3-10
Scanning a document in separate batches
(“Separate Scan” setting) ..............................................................3-12
Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass ............3-14
3.4
Specifying document settings ........................................................3-16
Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting) .....3-16
To copy documents with the “Mixed Original” setting .................3-16
Selecting the document orientation
(Original Direction settings) ...........................................................3-19
To select an Original Direction setting ..........................................3-20
Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings) ....3-21
To select a Margin setting ............................................................3-23
3.5
Selecting a Paper setting ................................................................3-24
Automatically selecting the paper size
(“Auto Paper Select” setting) ........................................................3-24
Manually selecting the desired paper size ....................................3-25
3.6
Specifying a Zoom setting ..............................................................3-27
Automatically selecting the zoom ratio
(“Auto Zoom” setting) ...................................................................3-27
Specifying the same zoom ratio as the document
(“×1.0” setting) ..............................................................................3-29
Slightly reducing the copy (“Minimal” setting) ..............................3-30
Finely adjusting the zoom ratio .....................................................3-31
Selecting a preset zoom ratio (Enlarge and Reduce settings) ......3-32
Typing in the zoom ratio ...............................................................3-33
Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios
(Individual Zoom settings) .............................................................3-34
Selecting a stored zoom ratio .......................................................3-36
Storing the desired zoom ratio .....................................................3-37
3.7
Selecting single-/double-sided settings for originals and
copies ...............................................................................................3-39
To select single-sided copies .......................................................3-40
To select double-sided copies .....................................................3-41
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
4
3.8
Specifying document quality/density settings ............................. 3-43
Specifying a document quality setting ......................................... 3-44
Adjusting the Copy Density (Density settings) ............................. 3-45
3.9
Selecting a Combine Originals setting ......................................... 3-46
Copying multiple document pages onto a single page
(combined copy settings) ............................................................. 3-49
3.10
Selecting finishing for copies ........................................................ 3-50
Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting) ................................... 3-53
Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting) ............................ 3-54
Stapling copies (staple settings) .................................................. 3-55
To bind copies with staples ......................................................... 3-56
Punching holes in copies (punch settings) .................................. 3-57
To punch holes in copies ............................................................. 3-57
Binding copies at the center ........................................................ 3-59
To bind copies at the center ........................................................ 3-59
3.11
Scanning the next document during printing
(reserving a copy job) ..................................................................... 3-61
To reserve a copy job .................................................................. 3-61
3.12
Stopping/deleting a job .................................................................. 3-63
To stop/delete a copy job ............................................................ 3-63
Additional copy operations
4.1
Checking the copy settings (Mode Check) .................................... 4-2
To check the settings ..................................................................... 4-2
To change the settings ................................................................... 4-4
4.2
Printing a sample to check the settings (Proof Copy) .................. 4-5
To make test prints ........................................................................ 4-5
4.3
Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode) ........................................ 4-7
To interrupt a copy job ................................................................... 4-7
4.4
Registering copy programs (Mode Memory) ................................. 4-8
To register a copy program ............................................................ 4-8
To recall a copy program ............................................................. 4-10
To checking the copy settings ..................................................... 4-11
To delete a registered copy program ........................................... 4-12
4.5
Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode) .............. 4-14
To display the Accessibility Settings screen ................................ 4-14
To set the “Screen Mode” function .............................................. 4-15
To set the “Key Speed Settings” function ................................... 4-16
To set the “Extend Auto Reset” function ..................................... 4-17
To set the “Notification Screen” function .................................... 4-18
To set the “Sound Setting” function ............................................ 4-19
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-9
Introduction
To set the “Key Sound Tones” function .......................................4-20
5
6
4.6
Job List screens ..............................................................................4-21
Jobs ..............................................................................................4-21
Multi-job feature ............................................................................4-21
Job List screens ............................................................................4-21
4.7
Performing operations on jobs ......................................................4-23
To check a job being performed ...................................................4-23
To check the printing order ...........................................................4-24
To delete a job ..............................................................................4-25
Troubleshooting
5.1
When the message “Malfunction detected.” appears
(Call technical representative) ..........................................................5-2
To correct the error .........................................................................5-3
5.2
When the message “Misfeed detected.” appears ..........................5-4
Location of paper misfeed ..............................................................5-4
Paper misfeed indications ..............................................................5-5
To clear a paper misfeed in the ADF ..............................................5-6
To clear a paper misfeed in the fusing unit .....................................5-8
To clear a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit .................5-12
To clear a paper misfeed in the bypass tray .................................5-13
To clear a paper misfeed in the 1st or 2nd tray ............................5-15
To clear a paper misfeed in the 3rd or 4th tray .............................5-17
To clear a paper misfeed in the LCT .............................................5-18
To clear a paper misfeed in the finisher ........................................5-19
To clear a paper misfeed in the mailbin kit ...................................5-22
To clear a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher ............................5-24
5.3
When the message “Replenish paper.” appears ..........................5-26
To replenish paper ........................................................................5-26
5.4
When the message “... Not enough remaining memory.”
appears .............................................................................................5-27
5.5
When the message “Please exchange toner.” appears ..............5-28
5.6
When the message “Stapler empty.” appears ..............................5-29
5.7
Basic troubleshooting .....................................................................5-30
5.8
Main messages and their remedies ...............................................5-34
Specifications
6.1
x-10
Specifications ....................................................................................6-2
Copier .............................................................................................6-2
Automatic Duplex Unit ....................................................................6-4
Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF-620 ...............................6-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-108 .......................................................... 6-5
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-206 .......................................................... 6-6
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-407 .......................................................... 6-6
Finisher FS-530 .............................................................................. 6-7
Punch Unit PU-501 ........................................................................ 6-8
Saddle Stitcher SD-507 ................................................................. 6-8
Output Tray OT-602 ....................................................................... 6-8
Mailbin Kit MT-502 ......................................................................... 6-9
Job Separator JS-502 .................................................................... 6-9
7
8
Copy paper/original documents
7.1
Copy paper ........................................................................................ 7-2
Possible paper sizes ...................................................................... 7-2
Paper types and paper capacities ................................................. 7-4
Special paper ................................................................................. 7-5
Precautions for paper .................................................................... 7-6
Paper storage ................................................................................. 7-6
Automatic paper-tray-switching feature ........................................ 7-7
Order for selecting the paper trays ................................................ 7-7
7.2
Specifying paper settings for the bypass tray ............................... 7-8
To specify the paper size (Change Setting) ................................... 7-8
To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings) .... 7-10
To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings) ........ 7-12
To specify a setting for special paper (Change Setting) .............. 7-15
7.3
Original documents ........................................................................ 7-17
Documents that can be loaded Into the ADF ............................... 7-17
Precautions for loading documents Into the ADF ........................ 7-18
Documents that can be placed on the original glass ................... 7-19
Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass ...... 7-19
Application functions
8.1
Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) ............................... 8-2
To copy using the “Cover Mode” function ..................................... 8-3
8.2
Inserting cover pages (“Insert Sheet” function) ............................ 8-5
To copy using the “Insert Sheet” function ..................................... 8-6
8.3
Inserting paper between overhead projector transparencies
(“OHP Interleave” function) ............................................................. 8-8
To copy using the “OHP Interleave” function ................................ 8-8
8.4
Adding filing margins to copies (“Page Margin” function) ......... 8-11
To copy using the “Page Margin” function .................................. 8-11
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-11
Introduction
9
x-12
8.5
Erasing unwanted areas of copies
(“Edge/Frame Erase” function) ......................................................8-13
To copy using the “Edge/Frame Erase” function .........................8-13
8.6
Tiling copy images (“Image Repeat” function) .............................8-15
To copy using the “Image Repeat” function .................................8-15
8.7
Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread
(“Book Copy” function) ...................................................................8-18
To copy using the “Book Copy” function .....................................8-19
8.8
Creating booklet copies (“Booklet” function) ...............................8-22
To copy using the “Booklet” function ...........................................8-23
8.9
Printing additional information on copies
(Image Settings functions) ..............................................................8-24
To print the distribution number (“Set Numbering” function) .......8-24
To print preset text at the center of the copy image
(“Stamp” function) .........................................................................8-26
8.10
Printing copies overlapping a different image
(“Image Overlay” function) .............................................................8-28
To store an overlay image (Store Overlay) ....................................8-28
To recall an overlay image ............................................................8-31
To check the overlay image ..........................................................8-33
8.11
Copying with light and dark coloring inversed
(“B/W Reverse” setting) ..................................................................8-35
To copy using the “B/W Reverse” setting ....................................8-35
8.12
Separate scan ..................................................................................8-36
To scan documents continuously .................................................8-36
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch
waste containers
9.1
Replacing the toner bottle ................................................................9-2
To replace the toner bottle .............................................................9-4
9.2
Replacing the staple cartridge .........................................................9-7
To replace the staple cartridge in finisher .......................................9-7
To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher .........................9-10
9.3
Clearing a staple jam ......................................................................9-14
To clear jammed staples in finisher ..............................................9-15
To clear jammed staples in the saddle stitcher ............................9-19
9.4
Emptying the waste containers ......................................................9-24
To empty the hole-punch waste container ...................................9-24
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
10 Care of the machine
10.1
Cleaning ........................................................................................... 10-2
Housing ........................................................................................ 10-2
Original glass ................................................................................ 10-3
Control panel ................................................................................ 10-4
Document pad ............................................................................. 10-5
Left partition glass ........................................................................ 10-5
10.2
Viewing counters (Total Counter) ................................................. 10-6
To view the contents .................................................................... 10-6
10.3
When the message “Preventative Maintenance is required.”
appears ............................................................................................ 10-7
11 Utility mode
11.1
Overview of Utility mode parameters ........................................... 11-2
List of registration information and parameters ........................... 11-2
11.2
Specifying User’s Choice settings ................................................ 11-9
To specify User’s Choice settings ............................................... 11-9
Mixed Original Detection ............................................................ 11-10
Language Selection ................................................................... 11-10
Measurement Unit Setting ......................................................... 11-11
Machine Authentication PW Change ......................................... 11-11
Default Setting Simplex/Duplex ................................................. 11-11
Auto Paper/Auto Zoom .............................................................. 11-11
Priority Tray ................................................................................ 11-12
Special Paper Setting ................................................................ 11-12
Zoom Ratio for Combine/Booklets ............................................ 11-12
Low Power Mode ....................................................................... 11-13
Sleep Mode ................................................................................ 11-13
LCD Back-Light OFF .................................................................. 11-13
Auto Reset ................................................................................. 11-13
Auto Reset when Account is changed ....................................... 11-14
4in1 Copy Order ......................................................................... 11-14
Default Quality/Density Modes .................................................. 11-14
Default Copy Output Levels ....................................................... 11-14
Print Density ............................................................................... 11-15
Default Finishing Mode .............................................................. 11-15
Sort/Non-Sort Auto Change ...................................................... 11-15
Output Tray Settings .................................................................. 11-16
Auto Paper Select for Small Orig. .............................................. 11-16
Crease/Center Staple ................................................................. 11-17
Default Screen ............................................................................ 11-17
Default Device ............................................................................ 11-18
Image Quality (ADF) ................................................................... 11-18
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-13
Introduction
11.3
Specifying User Management settings .......................................11-19
To specify user management settings ........................................11-19
Tone volume parameters ............................................................11-20
Panel Cleaning ............................................................................11-20
Toner Supply ...............................................................................11-20
11.4
Displaying the Administrator Management screen ....................11-21
To display the Administrator Management screen .....................11-21
11.5
Specifying Initial Settings .............................................................11-23
To specify initial settings .............................................................11-23
Date & Time Setting ....................................................................11-24
11.6
Specifying Administrator settings ................................................11-25
To specify administrator settings ................................................11-25
Administrator Code Input ............................................................11-26
Max. Copy Sets ..........................................................................11-26
Disable Sleep Mode ....................................................................11-26
11.7
Specifying the account/authentication settings
(User Authentication ON/OFF parameters) .................................11-27
To specify the account/authentication settings ..........................11-27
User Authentication ON/OFF ......................................................11-29
Allow Print without Authentication ..............................................11-29
11.8
Specifying account data settings ................................................11-31
To display the desired account ...................................................11-31
To register an account ................................................................11-32
To manage an account ...............................................................11-34
To delete an account ..................................................................11-36
Allowing printing without authentication .....................................11-37
11.9
Specifying user authentication settings ......................................11-38
To display the User Authentication screen .................................11-38
To register a user with external server authentication ................11-40
To register a user with machine authentication ..........................11-42
To manage a user for machine authentication ...........................11-46
To delete a user for machine authentication ..............................11-48
11.10 Specifying software switch settings (machine functions) .........11-50
To specify a software switch setting ..........................................11-51
Specifying permissions for copy functions (mode 307) ..............11-53
Specifying the enlarged display method (mode 311) .................11-53
Specifying that the “Auto Paper Select” setting and the
“Auto Zoom” setting can be selected at the same time
(mode 403) ..................................................................................11-54
Specifying the measurement units (mode 426) ..........................11-55
Specifying settings when copying is finished using the ADF
(mode 429) ..................................................................................11-55
x-14
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
Specifying the pressing of the [Access] key when logging off
(mode 438) ................................................................................. 11-56
Specifying use of registered user authentication information
to log on to the LDAP server (mode 466) ................................... 11-56
Specifying whether to enable access locks and password
rules, and specifying the method for deleting image data
(mode 469) ................................................................................. 11-57
Specifying the setting for displaying a list of users in the User
Authentication screen (mode 471) ............................................. 11-59
Specifying the deleting method for [Del.] in input screens
(mode 478) ................................................................................. 11-59
Specifying settings for limiting user authentication to only Scan
functions (mode 479) ................................................................. 11-60
11.11 Specifying security settings (Security Setting parameters) ..... 11-62
Before specifying the “Enhance Security” parameter ................ 11-62
Parameters that are changed when “Enhance Security” is
set .............................................................................................. 11-63
Specifying the “Enhance Security” parameter ........................... 11-64
Canceling an access lock (“Unlock” parameter) ........................ 11-66
To cancel an access lock ........................................................... 11-66
11.12 Managing the memory (Memory Management parameters) .... 11-68
To erase all data from the internal memory ............................... 11-68
11.13 Password rules ............................................................................. 11-70
12 Appendix
12.1
Entering text .................................................................................... 12-2
To type text .................................................................................. 12-2
List of available characters .......................................................... 12-3
12.2
Glossary ........................................................................................... 12-4
12.3
Index ................................................................................................ 12-7
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-15
Introduction
Available features
Automatically selecting the paper
The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the
size of the loaded document and the specified zoom ratio.
For details, refer to page 3-24.
Adjusting copies to the size of the paper
The most appropriate zoom ratio can automatically be selected based on the
size of the loaded document and the specified paper size.
For details, refer to page 3-27.
Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios
By specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, copies of the document can be resized as desired.
For details, refer to page 3-34.
ABC
ABC
ABC
Scanning the document in separate batches
A document with a large number of pages can be divided and scanned together in separate batches. Double-sided copies can be produced by using
the original glass, or the document pages can be loaded alternately onto the
original glass and into the ADF, and then all pages can be printed together
as a single job.
For details, refer to page 3-12 and page 3-14.
Sorting copies
A method for sorting the copies can be selected.
x-16
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
For details, refer to page 3-53 and page 3-54.
ABC
ABC
ABC
Stapling copies
Copies can be stapled together.
For details, refer to page 3-55.
ABC
ABC
Punching holes in copies
Holes for filing can be punched in the copies.
For details, refer to page 3-57.
ABC
Center binding
Copies can be folded at their center and bound with staples.
For details, refer to page 3-59.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-17
Introduction
Copying multiple document pages onto a single page
Multiple pages of the document can be printed together on a single copy.
For details, refer to page 3-46.
ABC
DEF
ABC DEF
Copying a document containing pages of various sizes
A document with pages of various sizes can be scanned and copied together.
For details, refer to page 3-16.
ABC
ABC
Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original
The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the document.
For details, refer to page 3-43.
Adding a cover page
Cover pages can be added to copies.
For details, refer to page 8-2.
ABC
x-18
COVER
ABC
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
Adding insertions, such as colored paper, within copies
Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted at specified locations
in the copies.
For details, refer to page 8-5.
GHI
DEF
ABC
ABC
GHI
DEF
Inserting paper (interleaves) between copies of overhead projector
transparencies
After each overhead projector transparency copy is printed, a page can be
added to the stack as an interleaf.
For details, refer to page 8-8.
DEF
ABC
ABC
DEF
Adding a binding margin to copies
Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing
binders.
For details, refer to page 8-11.
GHI
DEF
ABC
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
GHI
DEF
ABC
x-19
Introduction
Erasing sections of copies
Areas, such as the shadows of punched holes and transmission information
in received faxes, can be erased in copies.
For details, refer to page 8-13.
ABC
ABC
Repeating copy images
A document image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper.
For details, refer to page 8-15.
Separately copying a page spread
A page spread, such as in an open book or catalog, can be copied onto separate pages.
For details, refer to page 8-18.
ABC
DEF
Copying with a layout of a book or magazine
Copies can be made with the pages arranged in the layout for a book or magazine.
x-20
2
11 12
2
1
11
For details, refer to page 8-22.
12 1
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
Printing distribution numbers and stamps
Each copy set can be printed with distribution numbers or preset stamps.
For details, refer to page 8-24.
GHI
DEF
ABC
GHI
DEF
ABC
GHI
DEF
ABC
Printing copies overlapping a different image
Previously stored images can be printed overlapping copies.
For details, refer to page 8-28.
Copying with black and white reversed
A document can be copied with the black- and white-colored areas of images inversed.
For details, refer to page 8-35.
ABC
ABC
Checking copy jobs
The status of queued jobs can be checked.
For details, refer to page 4-21.
Programming copy settings
Frequently used copy settings can be programmed and recalled to be used
with other copy jobs.
For details, refer to page 4-8.
Checking the copy settings
Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed. From these
screens, the copy settings can also be changed.
For details, refer to page 4-2.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-21
Introduction
Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens
The text and buttons in the touch panel can be displayed in a larger size that
is easier to read, allowing basic copy operations to be easily performed.
For details, refer to page 2-19.
Interrupting a copy job
The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy
job to be printed.
For details, refer to page 4-7.
Printing a proof copy
Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can be printed
so that it can be checked.
For details, refer to page 4-5.
Saving copy documents
If the optional hard disk drive is installed, the contents of documents can be
saved in boxes.
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Box Operations].
x-22
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
Explanation of manual conventions
Titles indicate the contents of the section.
Text that appears in this manner
describes the function limitations
and options required to use certain
functions.
Auxiliary functions
8
8.10
Chapter 8
Images previously stored on the hard disk can be printed overlapping copies.
To store an overlay image (Store Overlay)
The Image Overlay function is available only if optional hard disk HD504 is installed.
Auxiliary functions
[ ]
Names highlighted as shown above
indicate keys on the control panel,
buttons in the touch panel, and the
power switches.
Printing copies overlapping a different image ( Image
Overlay function)
1
Position the overlay document to be stored on the hard disk.
2
Press the [Utility/Counter] key, and then touch
[User Setting].
The User Setting screen
appears.
Touch panel screens are shown to
check the actual display.
CAUTION
Handling toner and toner bottles
Do not throw toner or the toner bottle into a fire.
Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns.
Text that appears in this manner
describes supplemental information,
such as precautions, references and
actions, relating to steps.
3
Select the size of the
area to be scanned.
?
Text that appears in this manner
provides answers to problems and
questions that may occur during
operation.
4
To cancel changes to
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
What do the Book
Erase settings do?
If a Book Erase setting is selected, the
dark shadows
around the document or along the center of the document can be erased.
Touch [Enter].
8-30
WARNING , CAUTION
Text highlighted in this manner indicates precautions to ensure safe use of this machine.
“Warning” indicates instructions that, when not observed, may result in fatal or critical injuries.
“Caution” indicates instructions that, when not observed, may result in serious injuries or
property damage.
(The page shown above is an example only.)
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-23
Introduction
Auxiliary functions
5
8
Select the document orientation.
Auxiliary functions
6
Chapter 8
To cancel changes to
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
Press the [Start] key.
The document is scanned, and the overlay image is stored.
Reminder
Reminder
Text highlighted in this manner
indicates operation precautions.
Carefully read and observe this
type of information.
Be sure to use toner bottles of the specified model, otherwise the machine may be damaged.
Note
The size of the scanned area appears on the button where the image is
stored.
Detail
For details on replacing the toner bottle, refer to To replace the toner
bottle on page 9-4.
8-31
Detail
Text highlighted in this manner provides
more detailed information concerning
operating procedures or references to
sections containing additional information.
If necessary, refer to the indicated sections.
Note
Text highlighted in this manner
contains references and supplemental
information concerning operating
procedures and other descriptions.
We recommend that this information
be read carefully.
(The page shown above is an example only.)
x-24
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
User’s Guides
The following User’s Guides have been prepared for this machine.
User’s Guide [Copy Operations] (this manual)
This manual contains details on basic operations and the operating procedures for the various copy functions.
- Refer to this User’s Guide for details on operating procedures for copy
functions, including precautions on installation/use, turning the machine
on/off, loading paper, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing
paper misfeeds.
User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]
This manual contains details on specifying network functions for standard
equipment and on operations for scanning functions.
- Refer to this User’s Guide for details on operating procedures for network
functions and for using the Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB
and Internet fax operations.
User’s Guide [Box Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the Box functions.
- Refer to this User’s Guide for details on printing a proof copy or a locked
job and on functions that use the optional hard disk drive, such as routing
and saving documents in boxes.
User’s Guide [Print Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard
built-in printer controller.
- For details on the printing functions, refer to the User’s Guide (PDF file)
on the Driver CD-ROM.
Quick Guide [Print Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard
built-in printer controller.
- Refer to this Quick Guide for basic operating procedures on the printing
functions.
User’s Guide [Advanced Scan Operations]
This manual contains details on the operating procedures for the functions
that can be used when the optional scanner unit is installed.
- Refer to this User’s Guide for details on using the IP address faxing, IP
Relay and Scan to PC operations and on using IP Scanner.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-25
Introduction
User’s Guide [Facsimile Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the Fax functions.
- Refer to this User’s Guide for details on operating procedures for the Fax
functions when the fax kit is installed.
User’s Guide [Fax Driver Operations]
This manual contains function details on the fax driver, which is used to send
faxes directly from a computer.
- Refer to the User’s Guide (PDF file) on the Driver CD-ROM for details on
procedures for performing PC-FAX operations.
x-26
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
Descriptions and symbols for documents and paper
The use of words and symbols in this manual are explained below.
“Width” and “Length”
Whenever paper dimensions
are mentioned in this manual,
the first value always refers to
the width of the paper (shown
as “Y” in the illustration) and
the second to the length
(shown as “X”).
Paper orientation
Lengthwise (w)
If the width (Y) of the paper is
shorter than the length (X), the
paper has a vertical or portrait
orientation, indicated by w.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-27
Introduction
Crosswise (v)
If the width (Y) of the paper is
longer than the length (X), the
paper has a horizontal or landscape orientation, indicated
by v.
x-28
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Introduction
Legal restrictions on copying
Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent
to pass copies of such documents off as the originals.
The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to
responsible copying.
<Financial instruments>
- Personal checks
- Traveler’s checks
- Money orders
- Certificates of deposit
- Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
- Stock certificates
<Legal documents>
- Food stamps
- Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
- Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies
- Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
- Passports
- Immigration papers
- Motor vehicle licenses and titles
- House and property titles and deeds
<General>
- Identification cards, badges, or insignias
- Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner
In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner.
When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
x-29
Introduction
x-30
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1
Installation and operation precautions
Installation and operation
precautions
Chapter 1
Installation and operation precautions
Installation and operation precautions
Chapter 1
1
1
Installation and operation precautions
1.1
Safety information
This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance
of this machine. To achieve optimum utility of this device, all operators
should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual.
Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the supply. It contains important information related to user safety and preventing
equipment problems.
Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of this
manual.
KM_Ver.02E
2
Note
Some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the
purchased product.
Warning and precaution symbols
The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to
categorize the level of safety warnings.
WARNING
Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury
or even death.
CAUTION
Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property.
Meaning of symbols
A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take precaution.
This symbol warns against cause burns.
A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action.
This symbol warns against dismantling the device.
A solid circle indicates an imperative course of action.
This symbol indicates you must unplug the device.
1-2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1
Chapter 1
Installation and operation precautions
Disassemble and modification
Installation and operation precautions
WARNING
• Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which have been fixed to the product. Some
products have a high-voltage part or a laser
beam source inside that could cause an electrical shock or blindness.
• Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical
shock, or breakdown could result. If the product employs a laser, the laser beam source
could cause blindness.
Power cord
WARNING
• Use only the power cord supplied in the package. If a power cord is not supplied, only use
the power cord and plug that is specified in
POWER CORD INSTRUCTION. Failure to use
this cord could result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Use the power cord supplied in the package
only for this machine and NEVER use it for any
other product. Failure to observe this precaution could result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object
on, heat, twist, bend, pull on, or damage the
power cord. Use of a damaged power cord (exposed core wire, broken wire, etc.) could result
in a fire or breakdown.
Should any of these conditions be found, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug
the power cord from the power outlet, and then
call your authorized service representative.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1-3
Installation and operation precautions
Chapter 1
1
Power source
Installation and operation precautions
WARNING
• Use only the specified power source voltage.
Failure to do that could result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet
having the same configuration as the plug. Use
of an adapter leads to the product connecting
to inadequate power supply (voltage, current
capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or
shock. If proper wall outlet is not available, the
customer shall ask qualified electrician for the
installation.
• Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension cord in principle. Use of an adapter or
an extension cord could cause a fire or electrical shock.
Contact your authorized service representative
if an extension cord is required.
• Consult your authorized service representative
before connecting other equipment on the
same wall outlet. Overload could result in a fire.
CAUTION
• The outlet must be near the equipment and
easily accessible. Otherwise you can not pull
out the power plug when an emergency occurs.
1-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1
Chapter 1
Installation and operation precautions
Power plug
Installation and operation precautions
WARNING
• Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with
a wet hand, as an electrical shock could result.
• Plug the power cord all the way into the power
outlet. Failure to do this could result in a fire or
electrical shock.
CAUTION
• Do not tug the power cord when unplugging.
Pulling on the power cord could damage the
cord, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Remove the power plug from the outlet more
than one time a year and clean the area between the plug terminals. Dust that accumulates between the plug terminals may cause a
fire.
Grounding
WARNING
• Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet
that is equipped with a grounding terminal.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1-5
Installation and operation precautions
Chapter 1
1
Installation
Installation and operation precautions
WARNING
• Do not place a flower vase or other container
that contains water, or metal clips or other
small metallic objects on this product. Spilled
water or metallic objects dropped inside the
product could result in a fire, electrical shock,
or breakdown.
Should a piece of metal, water, or any other
similar foreign matter get inside the product,
immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug
the power cord from the power outlet, and then
call your authorized service representative.
CAUTION
• After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If the unit moves or falls, it may
cause personal injury.
• Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a
site exposed to soot or steam, near a kitchen
table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electrical
shock, or breakdown could result.
• Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, or in a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock. It could drop or fall, causing
personal injury or mechanical breakdown.
• Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes
of this product. Heat could accumulate inside
the product, resulting in a fire or malfunction.
• Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases
near this product, as a fire could result.
1-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1
Chapter 1
Installation and operation precautions
Ventilation
Installation and operation precautions
CAUTION
• Using this product in a poorly ventilated room
for a long time or producing a large volume of
copies or prints may cause the odor of exhaust
air from the machine. Ventilate the room well.
Actions in response to troubles
WARNING
• Do not keep using this product, if this product
becomes inordinately hot or emits smoke, or
unusual odor or noise. Immediately turn OFF
the power switch, unplug the power cord from
the power outlet, and then call your authorized
service representative. If you keep on using it
as is, a fire or electrical shock could result.
• Do not keep using this product, if this product
has been dropped or its cover damaged. Immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the
power cord from the power outlet, and then call
your authorized service representative. If you
keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock
could result.
CAUTION
• The inside of this product has areas subject to
high temperature, which may cause burns.
When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such as a paper misfeed, do not
touch the locations (around the fusing unit, etc.)
which are indicated by a “Caution HOT” caution label.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1-7
Installation and operation precautions
Chapter 1
1
Consumables
Installation and operation precautions
WARNING
• Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an
open flame. The hot toner may scatter and
cause burns or other damage.
CAUTION
• Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place
within easy reach of children. Licking or ingesting any of these things could injure your health.
• Do not store toner units and PC drum units near
a floppy disk or watch that are susceptible to
magnetism. They could cause these products
to malfunction.
When moving the machine
CAUTION
• Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect the power cord and other cables. Failure to do this could damage the cord or cable,
resulting in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown.
• When moving this product, always hold it by
the locations specified in the User’s Guide or
other documents. If the unit falls it may cause
severe personal injury. The product may also
be damaged or malfunction.
When the optional Fax Kit FK-503 is not installed:
Before successive holidays
CAUTION
• Unplug the product when you will not use the
product for long periods of time.
1-8
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 1
1.2
1
USER INSTRUCTIONS
FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users)
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
WARNING: The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and
are subject to FCC control. Any changes made by the purchaser or user
without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under
FCC regulations.
This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of nonshielded cable is likely to result in interference with radio communications
and is prohibited under FCC rules.
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE
4) (For Canada Users)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
For users in countries subject to Class B regulations
This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of non-shielded cable is likely
to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR 22 rules and
local rules.
For users in countries not subject to Class B regulations
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of non-shielded cable is likely
to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR 22 rules and
local rules.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1-9
Installation and operation precautions
Installation and operation precautions
Installation and operation precautions
1.3
Laser safety
This is a digital machine which operates using a laser. There is no possibility
of danger from the laser provided the machine is operated according to the
instructions in this manual.
Installation and operation precautions
Chapter 1
1
Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective
housing, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase
of user operation.
This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product: This means the machine
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Internal laser radiation
Maximum Average Radiation Power: 28.9 μW at the laser aperture of the
print head unit.
Wavelength: 770-795 nm
This product employs a Class 3b laser diode that emits an invisible laser
beam.
The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print
head unit.
The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM:
Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances.
Print Head
Laser Aperture
of the Print
Head Unit
The laser aperture is positioned behind
the developing unit inside the machine.
1-10
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Installation and operation precautions
This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990.
Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States
and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of
the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and
Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
The label shown on page 1-13 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is
5mW and the wavelength is 770-795 nm.
For European users
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is
5mW and the wavelength is 770-795 nm.
For Denmark users
ADVARSEL
Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder
IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene.
Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 5mW og
bølgelængden er 770-795 nm.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1-11
Installation and operation precautions
CDRH regulation
Chapter 1
1
Installation and operation precautions
Chapter 1
1
For Finland, Sweden users
Installation and operation precautions
LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla
saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 5mW ja aallonpituus on
770-795 nm.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider
gränsen för laserklass 1.
Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 5mW
och våglängden är 770-795 nm.
VARO!
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad.
Betrakta ej strålen.
For Norway users
ADVERSEL
Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider
grensen for laser klass 1.
Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 5mW og bølgelengde er 770-795 nm.
1-12
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1
Laser safety label
Installation and operation precautions
A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
Chapter 1
Installation and operation precautions
Ozone release
7 CAUTION
Locate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room
%
A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of
this machine. An unpleasant odor may, however, be created in poorly
ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations. For a comfortable, healthy, and safe operating environment, it is recommended that
the room well ventilated.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1-13
Installation and operation precautions
Chapter 1
1
Installation and operation precautions
REMARQUE
= Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée =
Une quantité d’ozone négligable est dégagée pendant le fonctionnement
de l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur
désagréable peut être ressentie dans les pièces dont l’aération est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolongée de l’appareil est effectuée. Pour
avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la
pièce ou se trouve l’appareil.
Acoustic noise (For European users only)
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der höchste
Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779.
Notification for US only
Contains Mercury in the LCD control panel backlighting lamp, and/or in the
scanning unit lamp. Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.
For EU member states only
This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product together with your household waste!
Please refer to the information of your local community or contact our dealers regrading the proper handling of end-of-life electric and electronic
equipments. Recycling of this product will help to
conserve natural resources and prevent potential
negative consequences for the environment and
human health caused by inappropriate waste
handling.
1-14
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1
For EU member states only
This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) Directive.
Installation and operation precautions
This device is not intended for use at a video workstation in compliance with
BildscharbV.
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß
BildscharbV vorgesehen.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 1
Installation and operation precautions
1-15
Installation and operation precautions
1.4
Caution notations and labels
Safety precaution notations and labels appear on this machine at the following positions.
Be very careful that an accident does not occur when operations such as removing paper misfeeds are performed.
Installation and operation precautions
Chapter 1
1
CAUTION
CAUTION
The area is extremely
hot. Touching any part
other than those
indicated may result in
burns.
1-16
The area around the
fusing unit is extremely
hot. Touching any part
other than those
indicated may result in
burns.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Installation and operation precautions
To ensure that machine operation, consumables replenishing, part replacement, and regular maintenance can easily be performed, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below.
60-1/2
47-1/2
44-3/4
13
8-1/4
28
4
44
59
15
4-3/4
16-1/2
24-1/4
Unit: inch
2
Reminder
Be sure to allow a clearance of 4 inch (100 mm) or more at the back of
this machine for the ventilation duct.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1-17
Chapter 1
Space requirements
Installation and operation precautions
1.5
1
Installation and operation precautions
1.6
Operation precautions
To ensure the optimum performance of this machine, observe the precautions described below.
Power source
Installation and operation precautions
Chapter 1
1
The power source requirements are as follows.
- Voltage fluctuation: Maximum ±10% (at 120 V/220-240 V AC)
- Frequency fluctuation: Maximum ±2.5 Hz (at 50 Hz/60 Hz)
– Use a power source with as little voltage or frequency fluctuations as
possible.
Operating environment
The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are as
follows.
- Temperature: 50°F (10°C) to 89.6°F (32°C) with fluctuations of no more
than 18°F (10°C) within an hour
- Humidity: 15% to 85% with fluctuations of no more than 20% within an
hour
- However, in an environment with a temperature of 89.6°F (32°C), maintain a relative humidity of 65% or less.
Storage of copies
To store copies, follow the recommendation listed below.
- Copies that are to be kept for a long time should be kept where they are
not exposed to light in order to prevent them from fading.
- Adhesive that contains solvent (e.g., spray glue) may dissolve the toner
on copies.
- Color copies have a thicker layer of toner than normal black-and-white
copies. Therefore, when a color copy is folded, the toner at the fold may
peel off.
1-18
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2
Before making copies
Before making copies
Chapter 2
Before making copies
2
Before making copies
2.1
Part names and their functions
Options
Before making copies
Chapter 2
2
11
1
2
10
7
9
8
6
No
1
2-2
5
4
3
Part name
Description
Main unit
The document is scanned by the scanner section, and the scanned image is printed by the
printer section.
Referred to as the “machine” or “main unit”
throughout the manual.
Original Cover OC-510
Presses down on the loaded document to keep
it in place. Referred to as the “original cover”
throughout the manual.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
Part name
Description
2
Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF-620
Automatically feeds one document sheet at a
time for scanning, and automatically turns over
double-sided documents for scanning if the
document was set as double-side from the
touch panel
Referred to as the “ADF” throughout the manual.
3
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-108
The top tray can be loaded with up to 500
sheets of paper, and the bottom tray can be
used as storage.
Referred to as the “single paper feed cabinet”
throughout the manual.
4
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-206
Both the top and bottom trays can each be
loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper.
Referred to as the “double paper feed cabinet”
throughout the manual.
5
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-407
Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of paper
Referred to as the “LCT” throughout the manual.
6
Desk DK-506
Allows this machine to be set up on the floor
Referred to as the “desk” throughout the manual.
7
Job Separator JS-502
Allows printed pages to be separated
Pull the lever when taking out the paper.
Referred to as the “job separator” throughout
the manual.
8
Finisher FS-530
Feeds out printed pages. The “Sort” setting
(separate by copy set), “Group” setting (separate by page), Staple settings (stapling), and
Punch settings (hole punching) are available.
Referred to as the “finisher” throughout the
manual.
9
Output Tray OT-602
Copy output tray installed onto the finisher and
used for separating printed pages
Referred to as the “optional output tray”
throughout the manual.
10
Saddle Stitcher SD-507
Installed onto the finisher to allow copies to be
stapled or bound at the center
Referred to as the “saddle stitcher” throughout
the manual.
11
Mailbin Kit MT-502
Installed onto the finisher to divide printed pages and feed them into the appropriate bin assigned to a specific individual or group (only
with PC printing)
Referred to as the “mailbin” throughout the
manual.
12
Punch Unit PU-501*
Installed onto the finisher to allow hole punching
to be used
Referred to as the “punch unit” throughout the
manual.
13
Fax Kit FK-503*
Allows this machine to be used as a fax machine
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-3
Before making copies
No
Chapter 2
2
Before making copies
Before making copies
Chapter 2
2
No
Part name
Description
14
Scanner Unit SU-501*
Internal network scanner unit that allows the
copier to be used as a scanner configured into a
computer network
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Advanced
Scan Operations].
15
Hard Disk HD-504*
Increases the number of document pages to be
scanned. In addition, multiple jobs can be
scanned.
16
Expanded Memory Unit EM-303/
304/305*
By expanding the memory, the number of
scanned pages that can be stored in the memory can be increased.
Referred to as the “expansion memory”
throughout the manual.
17
Fax Multi Line ML-502*
Installed to increase the telephone lines available for faxing
18
Dehumidifier Heater 1C*
Installed in the paper feed cabinet or desk to
prevent humidity from collecting in the paper
19
Local Interface Kit EK-502*
Used for making a local connection between
this machine and the computer
20
Stamp Unit SP-501*
Used installed on the ADF
Stamps scanned document pages to indicate
that they have been faxed
21
Security Kit SC-504*
Installed to encrypt the data saved on the hard
disk so that the hard disk can be used more
safely.
Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are internal options and therefore are not
shown in the illustration.
2-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
Outside of machine
1
Chapter 2
2
9
4
11
12
5
13
6
14
8
7
*The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional original cover
installed.
No.
Part name
Description
1
Control panel
Used to specify the various settings and perform operations such as starting copying
2
[Power] (auxiliary power) key
Press to turn on and off machine operations, for
example, for copying, printing or scanning.
When turned off, the machine enters a state
where it conserves energy.
3
Automatic duplex unit door release
lever
Used to open the automatic duplex unit door
4
Automatic duplex unit door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within
the automatic duplex unit
5
Release lever for main unit right-side
door
Used to open the right-side door of the main unit
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-5
Before making copies
3
10
Before making copies
2
Part name
Description
6
Multiple bypass tray
Used when printing onto paper with a size not
loaded into a paper tray or onto thick paper,
overhead projector transparencies, postcards,
envelopes or label sheets
Can be loaded with up to 150 sheets of plain paper, 50 overhead projector transparencies,
postcards, label sheets or sheets of thick paper,
or 10 envelopes
Referred to as the “bypass tray” throughout the
manual. (See page 2-60)
7
Tray extension
Pull out when large-sized paper is to be loaded.
8
Adjustable document guides
Adjust to the width of the paper.
9
Paper stopper
Prevents printed pages from falling out of the
output tray. Use when the optional job separator
is installed.
10
Copy output tray
Collects printed pages fed out of the copier facing down
11
Front door
Opened when replacing the toner bottle (See
page 9-2)
12
1st tray
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper
The paper size can be adjusted freely. (See
page 2-54)
13
2nd tray
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper
The paper size can be adjusted freely. (See
page 2-54)
14
Paper-empty indicator
As the amount of paper in the paper tray decreases, the area that appears in red increases.
Before making copies
Chapter 2
No.
2-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
Inside/back of main unit
1
Chapter 2
7
2
17 16
5
TEL PORT 1
4
11
12
10
LINE PORT 1
TEL PORT 2
13
14
LINE PORT 2
9
15
8
*The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional original cover
and ADF installed.
No.
Part name
Description
1
Document pad
Presses down on the document positioned on
the original glass
2
Original glass
Scans the image of the loaded document (See
page 3-10)
3
Switchback unit
Built into the printer to turn over the paper during double-sided printing
4
Automatic duplex unit
Turns over the paper for double-sided printing
5
Right-side door
Open when clearing paper misfeeds in the rightside door unit or the fusing unit
6
Toner hopper
Used when installing and replacing the toner
bottles
7
Document scales
Used to align the document (See page 3-10)
8
Power cord
Supplies power to the machine
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-7
Before making copies
3
6
Before making copies
Before making copies
Chapter 2
2
No.
Part name
Description
9
Main power switch
Used to turn the machine on and off (See
page 2-22, page 2-26)
10
ADF connector
Used for connecting the ADF hookup cord
11
TEL PORT1 jack
Used for connecting a telephone
12
LINE PORT1 jack
Used for connecting the general subscriber line
13
TEL PORT2 jack
Used for connecting the cord from the telephone
14
LINE PORT2 jack
Used for connecting the general subscriber line
15
IEEE1284 port (type C)
Used for connecting a parallel cable from the
computer
16
Network connector (10 Base-T/100
Base-TX)
Used for connecting the network cable when
this machine is used for network printing and
network scanning
17
USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1-compliant
Used for connecting a USB cable from the computer
18
Ozone filter*
Collects the ozone generated in the machine
19
Filter*
Collects the toner dust generated in the machine
Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are internal options and therefore are not
shown in the illustration.
2-8
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF-620
2
3
4
Before making copies
Chapter 2
1
5
No.
Part name
Description
1
Print indicator
Lights up or flashes to indicate the status of the
machine
2
Adjustable document guide
Adjusted to the width of the document (See
page 3-8)
3
Document feed tray
Loaded with the documents to be scanned facing up
4
Document output tray
Collects documents that have been scanned
5
Document stopper
Raised to prevent large-sized documents from
falling out of the document output tray
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-9
Before making copies
2
Before making copies
Chapter 2
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-108/PC-206/PC-407
1
2
3
4
5
6
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-108/PC-206
2-10
No.
Part name
Description
1
4th tray
Used for storage when the single paper feed
cabinet is installed
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper
when the double paper feed cabinet is installed
2
3rd tray
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper
3
Lower right-side door release lever
Used to open the lower right-side door
4
Lower right-side door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
Part name
Description
5
Tray release button
Pressed in order to pull out the LCT
6
LCT
Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of paper
Saddle Stitcher SD-507/Mailbin Kit MT-502
4
2
1
3
5
Saddle Stitcher SD-507
No.
Part name
Description
1
Copy output tray
Collects copies
2
Misfeed-clearing door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within
the finisher
Mailbin Kit MT-502
No.
Part name
Description
3
Mailbins
Collects printed pages
4
Misfeed-clearing door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds
5
Output tray cover
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-11
Before making copies
No.
Chapter 2
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-407
Before making copies
2
Chapter 2
Finisher FS-530/Output Tray OT-602/Punch Unit PU-501
Before making copies
2
12
1
11
3
10
4
9
8
7
6
5
Finisher FS-530
2-12
No.
Part name
Description
1
Output tray 2
(elevated tray)
Collects copies that are fed out
2
Output tray 1
(non-sorted copy tray)
Collects copies that are fed out
3
Lever FN1
Lowered when clearing paper misfeeds within
the finisher
4
Dial FN2
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
5
Hole-punch waste container
Removed when emptying hole-punch waste
that has accumulated from using the punch settings
6
Lever FN3
Lowered when clearing paper misfeeds within
the finisher
7
Lever FN4
Lowered when clearing paper misfeeds within
the finisher
8
Staple cartridge holder
Removed from the stapler unit when replacing
the staple cartridge or clearing jammed staples
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
No.
Part name
Description
9
Dial
Turned to move the staple cartridge holder toward you when replacing the staple cartridge or
clearing jammed staples
10
Dial FN5
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
11
Dial FN6
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
No.
Part name
Description
12
Optional output tray
Collects copies
Before making copies
Output Tray OT-602
Punch Unit PU-501
No.
Part name
Description
13
Punch Unit*
Punches holes for filing printed pages when
punch unit is installed onto finisher
Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are installed within the finisher and therefore
are not shown in the illustration.
Precautions for using the finisher:
- Do not place objects on top of the saddle stitcher or mailbin kit.
- Do not place objects below the output trays of the finisher.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 2
2
2-13
Before making copies
2
Control panel
Chapter 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
User Box Extra/Scan Fax/Scan
Reset
Copy
7
Access
ABC
DEF
Interrupt
GHI
JKL
MNO
Power
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
Accessibility
Before making copies
21
20
Proof Copy
Mode Memory
Stop
Enlarge Display
Utility/
Counter
8
9
Start
Contrast
10
11
Mode Check
Main Power
19
2-14
18 17 16
15
14 13 12
No.
Part name
Description
1
Touch panel
Displays various screens and messages.
Specify the various settings by directly touching
the panel.
2
[Access] key
If user authentication or account track settings
have been applied, press this key after entering
the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for
account track) in order to use this machine.
3
[User Box] key
Press to enter Box mode.
While the machine is in Box mode, the indicator
on the [User Box] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Box Operations].
4
[Extra Scan] key
Press to enter Extra Scan mode.
While the machine is in Extra Scan mode, the indicator on the [Extra Scan] key lights up in
green.
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network
Scanner Operations] and the User’s Guide [Advanced Scan Operations].
5
[Fax/Scan] key
Press to enter Fax/Scan mode.
While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green.
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Facsimile
Operations] and the User’s Guide [Advanced
Scan Operations].
6
[Copy] key
Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the
machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is
in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key
lights up in green.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
Part name
Description
7
[Reset] key
Press to clear all settings (except programmed
settings) entered in the control panel and touch
panel.
8
[Interrupt] key
Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the
[Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message “Now in Interrupt mode.” appears on the
touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press
the [Interrupt] key again.
9
[Power] (auxiliary power) key
Press to turn on and off machine operations, for
example, for copying, printing or scanning.
When turned off, the machine enters a state
where it conserves energy.
10
[Stop] key
Press the [Stop] key during copying to stop the
copy operation.
11
[Start] key
Press to start copying. When this machine is
ready to begin copying, the indicator on the
[Start] key lights up in green. If the indicator on
the [Start] key lights up in orange, copying cannot begin.
Press to restart a stopped job. For details on
jobs, refer to “Job List screens” on page 4-21
12
Main Power indicator
Lights up in green when the machine is turned
on with the main power switch
13
[Proof Copy] key
Press to print a single proof copy to be checked
before printing a large number of copies. (See
page 4-5)
14
Keypad
Use to type in the number of copies to be produced.
Use to type in the zoom ratio.
Use to type in the various settings.
15
[C] (clear) key
Press to erase a value (such as the number of
copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the
keypad.
16
[Mode Check] key
Press to display screens showing the specified
settings.
17
[Utility/Counter] key
Press to display the Utility/Counter screen.
18
[Mode Memory] key
Press to register the desired copy settings as a
program or to recall a registered copy program.
(See page 4-8)
19
Contrast dial
Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel.
20
[Enlarge Display] key
Press to enter Enlarge Display mode.
21
[Accessibility] key
Press to display the screen for specifying user
accessibility functions.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-15
Before making copies
No.
Chapter 2
2
Before making copies
2
2
Reminder
Chapter 2
Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be
scratched or damaged.
Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or
pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel.
Before making copies
!
Detail
A function other than a copy function cannot be selected while pages are
being scanned for copying or while copying is paused.
2-16
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
Basic settings screen (Basics screen)
To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the desired button
in the touch panel.
Before making copies
1
2
7
3
6
5
4
No.
Item name
Description
1
Message display area
The status of the machine and details on operations that must be performed are displayed
here.
2
Functions/settings display
Tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions are displayed.
Touch a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings.
3
Status display area
The amount of memory space available in addition to icons indicating the status of jobs and the
machine are displayed.
4
[Mixed Original] button
Touch to scan a document containing pages of
different sizes. (See page 3-16)
5
[Finishing] button
Touch to specify settings for sorting, grouping,
stapling, or hole punching. (See page 3-50)
6
[Job List] button
Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be
performed can be checked. (See page 4-21)
7
[Save in User Box] button
(Appears only when the hard disk
drive is installed)
Touch to save the data of scanned documents
in boxes. The destination boxes can be created,
file names can be specified, and saved documents can be printed.
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Box Operations].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 2
When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on, the
Basics screen appears.
2-17
Before making copies
2
Icons that appear in the screen
Chapter 2
Description
Indicates that copies are being made
Before making copies
Icon
Indicates that data is waiting to be printed
Indicates that pages are being printed
Indicates that printing was stopped
Indicates that computer data is being received
Indicates that computer data waiting to be printed remains
Indicates that the selected paper tray is empty
Indicates that the toner bottle must be replaced
Indicates that the imaging unit must be replaced
Indicates that the time for the periodic maintenance has passed on a machine that requires a periodic maintenance
Indicates that user authentication or account track settings have been
specified on this machine
Indicates that copying was stopped when a proof copy is printed
Indicates that “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”
2-18
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
Before making copies
Press the [Enlarge Display] key. Then, touch the touch panel to display the
selected area enlarged at the center of the panel. Press the [Enlarge Display]
key again to return the screens to the standard size. The usual touch panel
operations can be performed even when the screens are enlarged.
Chapter 2
Enlarging the touch panel screens
Touch in this
area to scroll
up and to the
left.
Touch this arrow
to scroll up.
Touch in this
area to scroll
up and to the
right.
Touch this
arrow to scroll
left. When the
left edge of the
screen is
reached, the
screen is
scrolled down
one line and
the right edge
is displayed.
Touch in this
area to scroll
down and to
the left.
Touch this
arrow to scroll
right. When
the right edge
of the screen
is reached,
the screen is
scrolled down
one line and
the left edge
is displayed.
Touch this arrow
to scroll down.
Touch in this
area to scroll
down and to
the right.
When a button on the screen is touched to display a different screen,
the screen returns to its standard size. However, touching the touch
panel again displays the screen enlarged.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-19
Before making copies
2
2.2
Adjusting the angle of the control panel
The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles.
Before making copies
Chapter 2
Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation.
ΠUpper position (base position)
 Middle position
Ž Lower position
To adjust the angle of the control panel
1
2-20
Pull the control panel release lever toward you,
and then push down on
the control panel.
Control panel release lever
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
2
Before making copies
Chapter 2
The control panel stops
at the middle position.
To adjust the control
panel to an even steeper
angle, pull the control
panel release lever toward you, and then push
down on the control
panel.
The control panel stops
at the lower position.
3
To return the control
panel to the upper position, pull the control panel release lever toward
you, and then pull up on
the control panel.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-21
Before making copies
2
2.3
Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power
Chapter 2
This machine has two power controls: the main power switch and the [Power] (auxiliary power) key.
To turn on the machine
The main power switch turns on/off all functions of the machine. Normally,
the main power switch is turned on.
Before making copies
The [Power] (auxiliary power) key turns on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key
is turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy.
2-22
1
Set the main power
switch to [ n ].
2
Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
!
The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after
the machine is turned on and before any setting is specified from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected when the [Reset]
key is pressed to cancel all settings specified from the control panel or
touch panel. The default settings can be changed. For more details, refer
to “Specifying User’s Choice settings” on page 11-9.
The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this
machine was sent from the factory.
2
Note
A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the
[Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on. For details, refer to “To scan
during warm-up” on page 2-24.
After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be
printed.
The machine takes about 14 seconds to warm up at normal room temperature (73.4°F) when the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on after
the main power switch is turned on.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-23
Before making copies
When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on, the indicator on the
[Start] key lights up in orange, and a screen indicating that the machine
is starting up appears.
After a few seconds, the message “Now warming up. Ready to scan.” appears on the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in
green, indicating that a job can now be queued.
Chapter 2
Detail
Before making copies
2
To scan during warm-up
1
Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key.
Chapter 2
The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange.
A screen appears, indicating that the machine is warming up.
How is the machine turned on?
% For details on turning on the machine, refer to “To turn on the machine” on page 2-22.
?
Before making copies
2
After the warm-up
screen is displayed, the
Basics screen appears.
After the message “Now
warming-up. Ready to
scan.” is displayed, the
message “Ready to
copy.” appears.
The indicator on the
[Start] key lights up in
green.
3
Specify the necessary copy settings.
How is the number of copies specified?
% For details on specifying the number of copies, refer to “General
copy operation” on page 3-2.
?
4
Using the keypad, specify the desired number of copies.
5
Position the document to be copied.
How is the document positioned?
% For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
?
2-24
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
6
2
Press the [Start] key.
Check that the document has finished being scanned, and then position the next document.
8
Specify new copy settings and the desired number of copies, and then
press the [Start] key.
–
After the machine has finished warming up, the jobs will automatically be printed in the order that they were queued.
How is the printing of a job stopped?
% Press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to “Stopping/deleting a job”
on page 3-63.
?
!
Detail
While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, copy settings can be specified and
a document can be scanned to reserve a copy job. After the machine has
finished warming up, the copies are automatically printed.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-25
Before making copies
7
Chapter 2
The document is scanned, and the job is added to the list of queued
jobs.
Before making copies
2
To turn off the machine
1
Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key.
Chapter 2
The touch panel goes off.
2
Before making copies
Set the main power
switch to [o].
2
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being
turned off.
Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power]
(auxiliary power) key while it is making copies or printing, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur.
Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power]
(auxiliary power) key while it is scanning or sending or receiving data, otherwise all scanned data or transmission data will be deleted.
Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued
job or stored data is waiting to be printed, otherwise the jobs will be deleted.
!
Detail
The following are cleared when the main power switch and [Power] (auxiliary power) key are turned off.
- Settings that have not been programmed
- Jobs queued to be printed
2-26
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
This is the automatic panel reset operation.
As the factory default, the automatic panel reset operation is performed after
1 minute.
!
Detail
The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed
and whether or not it is performed can be set from Utility mode. For details, refer to “Auto Reset” on page 11-13.
Whether or not the automatic panel reset operation is performed when
there is a change of user can be set from the Utility mode. For details, refer to “Auto Reset when Account is changed” on page 11-14.
Automatically returning to the screen given priority
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the screen is automatically changed to that for the mode given priority.
As the factory default, the Copy mode screen is displayed after 1 minute.
!
Detail
The mode screen that is displayed can be changed from the Utility mode.
For details, refer to “Default Screen” on page 11-17.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-27
Before making copies
If the [Reset] key is not pressed and no operation is performed for a specified
length of time, settings that have not been programmed, such as the number
of copies, are cleared and return to their default settings.
Chapter 2
Automatically returning to the default settings (Automatic panel reset)
Before making copies
2
Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel go
off, and the machine enters a mode where it conserves energy.
Chapter 2
This is the Low Power mode.
The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode.
As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes.
To recover from Low Power mode
Before making copies
1
Press any key in the control panel or touch the touch panel.
–
2
The Low Power mode can also be canceled by opening the original
cover or loading a document into the ADF.
The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up.
–
The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing (within 14 seconds at
normal room temperature (73.4°F)).
!
Detail
The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be set
from Utility mode. For details, refer to “Low Power Mode” on page 11-13.
Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy.
The machine conserves more power in Sleep mode than in Low Power
mode.
As the factory default, the machine enters Sleep mode after 1 minute.
To recover from Sleep mode
1
Press any key in the control panel or touch the touch panel.
–
2-28
The Sleep mode can also be canceled by opening the original cover
or loading a document into the ADF.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
2
The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up.
!
Detail
The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be set from
Utility mode. For details, refer to “Sleep Mode” on page 11-13.
Darkening the touch panel (LCD Back-Light Off)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel
goes off and the machine enters a mode where it conserves energy.
The power conservation effect is slightly reduced; however, the machine can
quickly recover to begin copying or printing.
As the factory default, the touch panel goes off after 1 minute.
To turn on the touch panel backlight
1
Press any key in the control panel or touch the touch panel.
–
2
The touch panel can also be turned on by opening the original cover
or loading a document into the ADF.
The job will be received immediately.
!
Detail
The length of time until the machine touch panel goes off can be set from
Utility mode. For details, refer to “LCD Back-Light OFF” on page 11-13.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-29
Chapter 2
The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing (within 30 seconds at
normal room temperature (73.4°F)).
Before making copies
–
Before making copies
2
Controlling machine use with user authentication (machine authentication)
Chapter 2
If machine authentication settings have been set by the administrator, this
machine can only be used by users registered with machine authentication.
Before making copies
0 When machine authentication settings have been specified, only users
that enter user names and passwords registered with user authentication
can use this machine.
0 Contact the machine’s administrator for a user name and password.
0 A maximum of 100 users can be registered with machine authentication.
2-30
1
Touch [User Name].
2
Type in the user name,
and then touch [Enter].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
Touch [Password].
4
Type in the password,
and then touch [Enter].
5
Touch [Login].
Before making copies
Chapter 2
3
2
–
If the user name or
password was incorrectly entered, the input screen appears
again. Type in the
correct user name
and password, and
then touch [Login]
– Instead of touching
[Login], press the
[Access] key to complete the operation.
The User Authentication screen disappears, and the Basics screen appears.
6
Make copies using the desired copy settings.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-31
Before making copies
2
7
When you are finished
printing, press the [Access] key.
Before making copies
Chapter 2
A message appears, requesting confirmation to
log off.
8
Access
Touch [Yes], and then
touch [Enter].
The User Authentication
screen appears.
!
Detail
For details on specifying settings for machine authentication, refer to
“Specifying account data settings” on page 11-31.
For details on logging on when external server authentication settings
have been specified, refer to “Controlling machine use with user authentication (external server authentication)” on page 2-33.
Machine authentication settings can be specified using the User Authentication parameters in Administrator Management, available from the
Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator.
2-32
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
2
However, if “Enhance Security” has been set to “ON”, [User List] does
not appear.
Controlling machine use with user authentication (external server authentication)
If external server authentication settings have been set by the network administrator, this machine can only be used by users registered with external
server authentication.
0 When external server authentication settings have been specified, only
users who enter user names and passwords registered with external
server user authentication can use this machine.
0 Contact the network administrator for a user name and password.
0 User names and passwords for external server authentication are registered and managed with the external server.
1
Touch [User Name].
–
If “Active Directory”
was selected in the
User Authentication
screen for external
server authentication
and default domain
name display in Administrator mode
was set to “ON”, [Domain Name] appears
with the domain
name set as the default. Touch [Domain Name] to display the list of
domains registered with Active Directory, and then select the desired domain. For details on specifying settings for external server
authentication, refer to “To register a user with external server authentication” on page 11-40.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-33
Before making copies
If Administrator Management settings have been specified to display a
list of user names, the desired user name can be selected from a list.
Touch [User List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it,
and then touch [OK].
Chapter 2
Note
Before making copies
2
If default domain name display in Administrator mode is set to
“OFF”, [Domain Selection] appears with the name of the default
server. Touch [Domain Selection] to display the list of domains registered with Active Directory, and then select the desired domain.
However, if multiple domains are not registered, [Domain Selection]
will not appear.
2
Type in the user name,
and then touch [Enter].
3
Touch [Password].
4
Type in the password,
and then touch [Enter].
Before making copies
Chapter 2
–
2-34
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
5
2
Touch [Login].
6
Make copies using the desired copy settings.
7
When you are finished
printing, press the [Access] key.
A message appears, requesting confirmation to
log off.
8
Access
Touch [Yes], and then
touch [Enter].
The User Authentication
screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-35
Before making copies
If the user name or
password was incorrectly entered, the input screen appears
again. Type in the
correct user name
and password, and
then touch [Login].
– Instead of touching
[Login], press the
[Access] key to complete the operation.
The User Authentication screen disappears, and the Basics screen appears.
Chapter 2
–
Before making copies
2
!
Detail
Chapter 2
External server authentication settings can be specified using the User
Authentication parameters in Administrator mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator.
Before making copies
For details on specifying settings for external server authentication, refer
to “To register a user with external server authentication” on page 11-40.
2-36
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
Limiting user access with account track
0 When account track settings have been specified, only users that enter
registered account names and passwords can use this machine.
0 Contact your administrator for passwords.
0 A maximum of 1000 accounts can be registered.
1
Touch [Account Name].
2
Type in the account
name, and then touch
[Enter].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-37
Before making copies
This is account track.
Chapter 2
If the account track settings have been set by the administrator, only users
of registered accounts can use this machine. In addition, the number of
prints produced with each account can be controlled.
Before making copies
2
Touch [Password].
4
Type in the password,
and then touch [Enter].
5
Press the [Access] key.
Before making copies
Chapter 2
3
–
If the account name
or password was incorrectly entered, the
input screen appears
again. Type in the
correct account
name and password,
and then press the
[Access] key.
The Account Track
screen disappears, and
the Basics screen appears.
6
2-38
Access
Make copies using the desired copy settings.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
A message appears, requesting confirmation to
log off.
8
Access
Chapter 2
When you are finished
printing, press the [Access] key.
Before making copies
7
2
Touch [Yes], and then
touch [Enter].
The Account Track
screen appears.
!
Detail
For details on specifying account track settings, refer to “Specifying account data settings” on page 11-31.
The accounts can be managed using the Account Data parameters in Administrator mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be
specified by the administrator.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-39
Before making copies
2
Controlling machine use with user authentication (external server authentication) and account track
Chapter 2
If user authentication settings have been specified and accounts have been
registered by the administrator, the use of this machine by that user can be
managed with each account.
Before making copies
Users registered with multiple accounts can switch the account that is
logged on to be able to use this machine. An example where external server
authentication settings have been specified with user authentication is described below.
0 Contact your administrator for passwords.
0 User names and passwords for external server authentication are registered and managed with the external server.
1
Touch [User Name].
–
–
–
2-40
For details on specifying settings for external server
authentication, refer
to “To register a user
with external server
authentication” on
page 11-40.
If “Active Directory”
was selected in the
User Authentication
screen for external server authentication and default domain name
display in Administrator mode was set to “ON”, [Domain Name] appears with the domain name set as the default. Touch [Domain
Name] to display the list of domains registered with Active Directory, and then select the desired domain. For details on specifying
settings for external server authentication, refer to “To register a
user with external server authentication” on page 11-40.
If default domain name display in Administrator mode is set to
“OFF”, [Domain Selection] appears. Touch [Domain Selection] to
display the list of domains registered with Active Directory, and
then select the desired domain. However, if multiple domains are
not registered, [Domain Selection] will not appear.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
Type in a user name
specified with external
server authentication,
and then touch [Enter].
3
Touch [Password].
4
Type in the password,
and then touch [Enter].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
Chapter 2
2
2
2-41
Before making copies
2
5
Touch [Login].
If the user name or
password was incorrectly entered, the input screen appears
again. Type in the
correct user name
and password, and
then touch [Login].
– Instead of touching
[Login], press the
[Access] key to complete the operation.
The user authentication screen disappears, and the Basics screen appears.
Before making copies
Chapter 2
–
6
Touch [Account Name].
7
Type in the account
name, and then touch
[Enter].
–
2-42
For details on specifying account track
settings, refer to
“Specifying account
data settings” on
page 11-31.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
Touch [Password].
9
Type in the password,
and then touch [Enter].
10
Press the [Access] key.
If the account name
or password was incorrectly entered, the
input screen appears
again. Type in the
correct account
name and password,
and then press the
[Access] key.
The Account Track
screen disappears, and
the Basics screen appears.
Before making copies
Chapter 2
8
2
–
11
Access
Make copies using the desired copy settings.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-43
Before making copies
2
12
When you are finished
printing, press the [Access] key.
Before making copies
Chapter 2
A message appears, requesting confirmation to
log off.
13
Access
Touch [Yes], and then
touch [Enter].
The User Authentication
screen appears.
!
Detail
External server authentication and account track settings can be specified in Administrator mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings
should be specified by the administrator.
2
Note
If machine authentication settings have been specified with user authentication, it can be synchronized with account track.
If user authentication and account track are synchronized, log on from
the user authentication screen to display the Basics screen. For details,
refer to “Controlling machine use with user authentication (machine authentication) and account track synchronized” on page 2-50.
2-44
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
Users registered with multiple accounts can switch the account that is
logged on to be able to use this machine. An example where machine authentication settings have been specified with user authentication is described below.
0 Contact your administrator for passwords.
0 A maximum of 100 users can be registered with machine authentication,
and a maximum of 1,000 account names can be registered.
1
Touch [User Name].
–
–
–
–
Machine authentication settings can be
specified using the
User Authentication
parameters in Administrator mode,
available from the
Utility mode. Settings should be
specified by the administrator.
If Administrator mode settings have been specified to display a list
of user names, the desired user name can be selected from a list.
Touch [User List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. However, if “Enhance Security” has
been set to “ON”, [User List] does not appear.
For details on specifying settings for machine authentication, refer
to “To register a user with machine authentication” on page 11-42.
For details on logging on when external server authentication settings have been specified, refer to “Controlling machine use with
user authentication (external server authentication)” on page 2-33.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-45
Before making copies
If user authentication settings have been specified and accounts have been
registered by the administrator, the use of this machine by that user can be
managed with each account.
Chapter 2
Controlling machine use with user authentication (machine authentication) and account track
Before making copies
2
Type in a user name
specified with machine
authentication, and then
touch [Enter].
3
Touch [Password].
4
Type in the password,
and then touch [Enter].
Before making copies
Chapter 2
2
2-46
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
5
2
Touch [Login].
6
Touch [Account Name].
7
Type in the account
name, and then touch
[Enter].
–
For details on specifying account track
settings, refer to
“Specifying account
data settings” on
page 11-31.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-47
Before making copies
If the user name or
password was incorrectly entered, the input screen appears
again. Type in the
correct user name
and password, and
then touch [Login].
– Instead of touching
[Login], press the
[Access] key to complete the operation.
The user authentication screen disappears, and the Basics screen appears.
Chapter 2
–
Before making copies
2
Touch [Password].
9
Type in the password,
and then touch [Enter].
10
Press the [Access] key.
Before making copies
Chapter 2
8
–
If the account name
or password was incorrectly entered, the
input screen appears
again. Type in the
correct account
name and password,
and then press the
[Access] key.
The Account Track
screen disappears, and
the Basics screen appears.
11
2-48
Access
Make copies using the desired copy settings.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
A message appears, requesting confirmation to
log off.
13
Access
Chapter 2
When you are finished
printing, press the [Access] key.
Before making copies
12
2
Touch [Yes], and then
touch [Enter].
The User Authentication
screen appears.
!
Detail
Machine authentication and account track settings can be specified in
Administrator mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be
specified by the administrator.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-49
Before making copies
2
Controlling machine use with user authentication (machine authentication) and account track synchronized
Chapter 2
If machine authentication settings have been specified with user authentication, the settings can be synchronized with the account track settings.
Users can log on from the User Authentication screen.
Before making copies
0 Contact your administrator for passwords.
0 A maximum of 100 users can be registered with machine authentication,
and a maximum of 1,000 account names can be registered.
2-50
1
Touch [User Name].
2
Type in a user name
specified with machine
authentication, and then
touch [Enter].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
Touch [Password].
4
Type in the password,
and then touch [Enter].
5
Touch [Login].
Before making copies
Chapter 2
3
2
–
If the user name or
password was incorrectly entered, the input screen appears
again. Type in the
correct user name
and password, and
then touch [Login]
– Instead of touching
[Login], press the
[Access] key to complete the operation.
– If an account synchronized with machine authentication is renamed
or deleted, the message “Your Account has been deleted. Please
contact your administrator.” appears.
The User Authentication screen disappears, and the Basics screen appears.
6
Make copies using the desired copy settings.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-51
Before making copies
2
7
When you are finished
printing, press the [Access] key.
Before making copies
Chapter 2
A message appears, requesting confirmation to
log off.
8
Access
Touch [Yes], and then
touch [Enter].
The User Authentication
screen appears.
!
Detail
For details on specifying settings for machine authentication, refer to
“Specifying account data settings” on page 11-31.
For details on logging on when external server authentication settings
have been specified, refer to “Controlling machine use with user authentication (external server authentication)” on page 2-33.
Machine authentication settings can be specified using the User Authentication parameters in Administrator Management, available from the
Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator.
2-52
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
2
Touch [User List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it,
and then touch [OK].
However, if “Enhance Security” has been set to “ON”, [User List] does
not appear.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-53
Before making copies
If Administrator mode settings have been specified with machine authentication to display a list of user names, the desired user name can be selected from a list.
Chapter 2
Note
Before making copies
2
2.4
Loading paper into the 1st or 2nd tray
Chapter 2
Follow the procedure described below to load paper into the 1st and 2nd
trays or into the optional double paper feed cabinet (3rd and 4th trays).
Before making copies
To load paper (1st or 2nd tray)
1
Pull out the paper tray to be loaded with paper.
2
Slide the lateral guides
to fit the size of paper to
be loaded.
Lateral guide
2-54
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
–
, mark
Chapter 2
Load the paper into the
tray so that the side of
the paper to be printed
on (the side facing up
when the package was
unwrapped) faces up.
Do not load so many
sheets of paper that
the top of the stack is
higher than the ,
mark. A maximum of
500 sheets can be
loaded.
Before making copies
3
2
Film
How is curled paper
loaded?
% Flatten the paper before loading it.
?
4
Re-adjust the lateral
guides to fit the size of
the paper.
5
Close the paper tray.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-55
Before making copies
2
2
Reminder
Chapter 2
Be careful not to touch the Film with your hands.
If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the
paper size will not be correctly detected. Be sure to adjust the lateral
guides to the size of the loaded paper.
Before making copies
!
Detail
For details on the paper that can be loaded into the 1st and 2nd trays,
refer to “Copy paper/original documents” on page 7-2.
2-56
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2.5
2
Loading paper into the LCT
1
Press the tray release
button.
2
Pull out the LCT.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
0 If the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, even though the main
power switch is on, the LCT cannot be pulled out, even after the tray release button is pressed. Be sure that the machine is turned on with the
[Power] (auxiliary power) key.
Chapter 2
To load paper (LCT)
2-57
Before making copies
2
Chapter 2
3
Load the paper into the
right side of the LCT so
that the side of the paper
to be printed on (the side
facing up when the
package was unwrapped) faces up.
Do not load so many
sheets that the top of
the stack is higher
than the , mark. A
maximum of 2,500
sheets can be loaded.
How is curled paper loaded?
% Flatten the paper before loading it.
Before making copies
–
Film
?
2-58
4
Load the paper into the
left side of the LCT so
that the side of the paper
to be printed on (the side
facing up when the
package was unwrapped) faces up.
5
Close the LCT.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
2
Reminder
Detail
For details on the paper that can be loaded into the LCT, refer to “Copy
paper/original documents” on page 7-2.
2
Note
If the machine has entered Sleep mode, the LCT cannot be pulled out,
even after the tray release button is pressed. Be sure to first cancel Sleep
mode.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-59
Before making copies
!
Chapter 2
Be careful not to touch the Film with your hands.
Before making copies
2
2.6
Loading paper into the bypass tray
Chapter 2
Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto
paper that is not loaded into a paper tray, or if you wish to copy onto thick
paper, postcards, envelopes, overhead projector transparencies or label
sheets.
To load paper (bypass tray)
1
Open the bypass tray.
Before making copies
–
When loading largesized paper, pull out
the tray extension.
Tray extension
2
With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much
as possible into the feed slot.
3
Slide the lateral guides
to fit the size of paper
being loaded.
–
Do not load so many
sheets that the top of
the stack is higher
than the , mark. A
maximum of 150
sheets of plain paper
can be loaded.
– Slide the lateral
guides firmly up
against the edges of
the paper.
How is curled paper loaded?
% Flatten the paper before loading it.
Lateral guides
?
2-60
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
Select the paper type.
Before making copies
Chapter 2
4
2
What paper type is selected when label sheets are loaded?
% Select “Thick”.
?
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-61
Before making copies
2
2
Reminder
Chapter 2
For details on the paper sizes, refer to “Copy paper” on page 7-2.
2
Reminder
Before making copies
When loading postcards, load them in the w orientation, as shown. Do
not load postcards in the v orientation.
A maximum of 50 postcards can be loaded into the bypass tray.
2
Reminder
A maximum of 50 overhead projector transparencies can be loaded into
the bypass tray.
2-62
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
2
When loading envelopes, load them with the flap side up, as shown. If the
envelopes are loaded with the flap side down, a paper misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on.
A maximum of 10 envelopes can be loaded into the bypass tray.
After you have loaded the paper, set the paper type for the bypass tray
in the touch panel.
If the Envelope setting was set, the loaded document is copied upsidedown.
Flap side
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-63
Before making copies
Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is
removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed,
otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may
occur.
Chapter 2
Reminder
Before making copies
2
2
Reminder
Chapter 2
Be sure to load label sheets so that the side to be printed on faces down.
Before making copies
A maximum of 50 label sheets can be loaded into the bypass tray.
2
Reminder
A maximum of 150 sheets of thin paper can be loaded into the bypass
tray.
2
Note
The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when
the paper is loaded into the bypass tray.
2-64
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Before making copies
2
!
Before making copies
For details on specifying the paper size for the bypass tray, refer to “To
specify the paper size (Change Setting)” on page 7-8.
Chapter 2
Detail
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2-65
Before making copies
Before making copies
Chapter 2
2
2-66
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
3
Basic copy operation
3
3
Basic copy operation
3.1
General copy operation
This section contains information on the general operation for making copies.
Chapter 3
The following procedure describes how to copy a single-sided document using basic copy operations.
2
Note
Basic copy operation
Some settings cannot be used together.
For details on the settings that cannot be combined, refer to “Operations
that cannot be combined” on page 3-5.
To make a copy
1
Press the [Copy] key to display the Basics screen in Copy mode.
2
Position the document to be copied.
–
3-2
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
The factory default
settings for this machine are listed below.
Paper: Auto Paper
Zoom: ×1.000 (Full
size)
Simplex/Duplex: 1 %
1
Quality/Density: Text
For details on specifying document settings, refer to “Specifying
document settings” on page 3-16.
For details on selecting a paper source setting, refer to “Selecting
a Paper setting” on page 3-24.
For details on specifying a Zoom setting, refer to “Specifying a
Zoom setting” on page 3-27.
For details on selecting a Simplex/Duplex setting, refer to “Selecting single-/double-sided settings for originals and copies” on
page 3-39.
For details on selecting the quality of the document and the copy
density, refer to “Specifying document quality/density settings” on
page 3-43.
For details on specifying combined copy settings, refer to “Selecting a Combine Originals setting” on page 3-46.
For details on specifying Finishing settings, refer to “Selecting finishing for copies” on page 3-50.
For details on selecting the binding setting, refer to “Creating booklet copies (“Booklet” function)” on page 8-22.
For details on specifying settings for the Application functions, refer
to “Application functions” on page 8-2.
Using the keypad, type
in the desired number of
copies.
–
If the number of copies was incorrectly
entered, press the
[C] (clear) key in the
keypad, and then
specify the correct
number of copies.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-3
Chapter 3
Specify the desired copy
settings.
Basic copy operation
3
3
Basic copy operation
3
5
Press the [Start] key.
Chapter 3
–
Basic copy operation
–
To stop the copy opStop
eration being perStart
formed, press the
[Stop] key. For details, refer to “Stopping/deleting a job”
on page 3-63.
The next copy operation can be queued
while a copy operation is being performed. For details,
refer to “Scanning the next document during printing (reserving a
copy job)” on page 3-61.
2
Note
If the optional hard disk drive is installed, [Save in User Box] appears in
the Copy mode screen. If copies are made with “Save in User Box” selected, the contents of the copied documents are saved in boxes.
For details on boxes, refer to the User’s Guide [Box Operations].
!
Detail
A function other than a copy function cannot be selected while pages are
being scanned for copying or while copying is paused.
3-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3.2
3
Operations that cannot be combined
Certain copy settings cannot be used together.
2
Note
Depending on the combined operations and the selected paper type,
some settings that can be specified may not be applied.
Chapter 3
Specifying settings that cannot be combined will result in one of the following.
- The setting specified last is given priority. (The setting specified first is
canceled.)
- The setting specified first is given priority. (A warning message appears.)
The procedure for setting the “Book Copy” function after selecting the “4 in
1”setting is described below.
1
Select the “4 in 1” setting.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-5
Basic copy operation
Operations where the setting specified last is given priority
Basic copy operation
3
2
Set the “Book Copy”
function.
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
The “4 in 1” setting is automatically canceled,
and the“Book Copy”
function is set.
3-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Operations where the setting specified first is given priority
If a warning message appears, indicating that settings cannot be combined,
those settings cannot be specified together.
The procedure for selecting the “Corner Staple” setting after setting the
“Booklet” function is described below.
Set the “Booklet” function.
2
Select the “Corner Staple” setting.
The message “This
mode is not available
with Booklet.” appears
and the “Corner Staple”
setting cannot be selected.
The “Booklet” function
remains selected and
the “Corner Staple” setting is canceled.
To select the “Corner Staple” setting, cancel the “Booklet” function,
and then select the “Corner Staple” setting.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-7
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
1
Basic copy operation
3
3.3
Feeding the document
Chapter 3
The document can be loaded into the optional ADF or positioned on the original glass.
Document feed method
Features
Using the ADF
By using the ADF, a multi-page document can be fed automatically, one page at a time. This feed method can also be
used to automatically scan double-sided documents.
Using the original glass
Place the document directly on the original glass so that it
can be scanned. This method is best with books and other
documents that cannot be fed through the ADF.
To load the document into the ADF
Basic copy operation
0 Do not load documents that are bound together, for example, with paper
clips or staples.
0 For details on the types of documents that can be loaded into the ADF,
refer to “Original documents” on page 7-17.
0 Do not load more than 80 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the
stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the document or machine may occur. However, a document that
exceeds 80 pages can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer
to “Scanning a document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)”
on page 3-12.
0 If the document is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight or a
document misfeed or damage to the document may occur.
1
3-8
Slide the adjustable document guides to fit the
size of the document.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
2
Load the document face
up in the document feed
tray.
Load the document
pages so that the top
of the document is
toward the back or
the left side of the
machine.
A
A
3
Slide the adjustable document guides against
the edges of the document.
–
–
–
For details on loading documents of
mixed sizes, refer to
“Copying documents
of mixed sizes
(“Mixed Original”
Adjustable document guide
setting)” on
page 3-16.
For details on selecting the orientation of the document, refer to “Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)” on page 3-19.
For details on specifying the binding margin position, refer to “Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)” on
page 3-21.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-9
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
–
3
Basic copy operation
3
To place the document on the original glass
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
0 For details on the types of documents that can be placed on the original
glass, refer to “Original documents” on page 7-17.
0 When placing the document on the original glass, be sure to lift open the
original cover or ADF at least 15°.
If the document is placed on the original glass without the original cover
or ADF being lifted at least 15°, the correct document size will not be detected.
0 Do not place objects weighing more than 4-1/2 lb on the original glass. In
addition, do not press down extremely hard on a book spread placed on
the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged.
0 For thick books or large objects, make the copy without closing the original cover or ADF. When a document is being scanned with the original
cover or ADF open, do not look directly at the light that may shine through
the original glass. Although the light that shines through the original glass
is bright, it is not a laser beam and, therefore, is not as dangerous.
1
Lift open the original cover or ADF.
2
Position the document face down onto the original glass.
–
Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the back or the left side of the machine.
When loaded in the
v orientation:
When loaded in the
w orientation:
15˚
3-10
15˚
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
–
–
–
–
–
4
For details on selecting the orientation of
the document, refer
to “Selecting the
document orientaDocument scales
tion (Original Direction settings)” on
page 3-19.
For details on specifying the binding margin position, refer to “Selecting the position of
the binding margin (Margin settings)” on page 3-21.
For transparent or
translucent documents, place a blank
sheet of paper of the
same size as the
document over the
Blank sheet
document.
of paper
For bound documents spread over
two facing pages,
such as a book or
magazine, position
the top of the document toward the
back of this machine
and align the spine of
the document with
the book mark in the
document scale, as
shown.
For details on copying books, refer to “Producing separate copies of each page in a
page spread (“Book Copy” function)” on page 8-18.
Close the original cover or ADF.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-11
Chapter 3
Align the document with
the
mark in the
back-left corner of the
document scales.
Basic copy operation
3
3
Basic copy operation
3
Scanning a document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)
A large document can be divided and continuously scanned in a number of
batches.
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
A maximum of 80 document pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time.
However, by copying with the “Separate Scan” setting, a document that exceeds 80 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition,
the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the
ADF during the scanning operation.
1
In the Application
screen, touch [Separate
Scan].
–
3-12
To cancel the “Separate Scan” setting,
touch [Separate
Scan] again to deselect it.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
2
3
Load the first batch of
the document, and then
press the [Start] key.
Scanning begins.
–
–
–
Load the next batch
of the document, and
then press the [Start]
key.
If the document cannot be loaded into the ADF, place it on the original glass. For details on the types of documents that can be loaded
into the ADF, refer to “Original documents” on page 7-17.
Repeat step 2 until all pages of the document have been scanned.
The amount of memory available can be checked beside “Memory
Free” in the lower-right corner of the Basics screen.
To delete the scanned image, press the [Stop] key, and then delete
the job. For details, refer to “Stopping/deleting a job” on page 3-63.
In addition, the job can be deleted from the Job List screen. For details, refer to “To delete a job” on page 4-25.
3
After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish].
4
Press the [Start] key.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-13
Basic copy operation
–
Chapter 3
The message “To continue scanning, replace
original and press Start.”
appears.
Basic copy operation
3
Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass
When making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass,
place each page of a multi-page document on the original glass to scan it.
The following procedure describes how to place single-sided document
pages on the original glass to make double-sided copies.
Lift open the original cover or ADF.
2
Position the first page or the first side of the document face down onto
the original glass.
Chapter 3
1
–
For details on positioning the document, refer to “To place the document on the original glass” on page 3-10.
Basic copy operation
When loaded in the
v orientation:
When loaded in the
w orientation:
15˚
3
Close the original cover or ADF.
4
In the Basics screen,
touch [Simplex/Duplex].
15˚
The Simplex/Duplex
screen appears.
3-14
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
6
Press the [Start] key.
Scanning begins.
Chapter 3
Touch [Single-Sided] under “Original” and [Double-Sided] under
“Copy”.
Basic copy operation
5
3
The message “To continue scanning, replace
original and press Start.”
appears.
7
Position the second page or second side of the document onto the
original glass, and then press the [Start] key.
–
To scan the remaining pages in the document, repeat steps 5
through 7.
8
After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish].
9
Press the [Start] key.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-15
Basic copy operation
3
3.4
Specifying document settings
The following procedure describes how to specify the type of document to
be copied.
Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting)
Documents of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed
and scanned one by one automatically.
Chapter 3
Mixed originals paper sizes
The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard-sized paper that can be used with the “Mixed Original” setting.
Basic copy operation
Maximum Document
Width*1→
11 × 17
w
Letter v
Legal w
Letter
w
↓ Document Size*2
5-1/2 ×
8-1/2
v
5-1/2 ×
8-1/2
w
11 × 17 w
o
o
—
—
—
—
Letter v
o
o
—
—
—
—
Legal w
o
o
o
o
o
—
Letter w
o
o
o
o
o
—
5-1/2 × 8-1/2 v
—
—
o
o
o
—
5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
—
—
—
—
—
o
o: Possible
—: Not possible
To copy documents with the “Mixed Original” setting
0 The possible combinations of document sizes differ depending on the
widest document loaded (position of the adjustable document guides of
the ADF).
0 *1 Indicates the width of the widest document size of the mixed originals
(width of the adjustable document guides of the ADF).
*2 Indicates document sizes that can be specified together with the max0
imum document width.
1
3-16
Slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the largest page.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Arrange the document pages so that the side to be copied (first page)
faces up, as shown in the illustration.
3
Load the document face
up in the document feed
tray.
Slide the adjustable document guides against
the edges of the document.
–
–
4
Load the document
pages into the ADF
so that the top of the
pages is toward the
back or the left side
of the machine.
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
2
Adjustable document guide
If the document is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight
or a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur.
In the Basics screen,
touch [Mixed Original].
–
To cancel the “Mixed
Original” setting,
touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect
it.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-17
Basic copy operation
3
5
Press the [Start] key.
Scanning begins.
!
Detail
Chapter 3
Do not load more than 80 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the
stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the document or machine may occur. However, a document that
exceeds 80 pages can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer
to “Scanning a document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)”
on page 3-12.
2
Basic copy operation
Note
If the “Mixed Original” setting was selected, double-sided copying cannot be selected.
3-18
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)
When copying double-sided documents, making double-sided copies, or
using a combined copy setting, specify the document orientation, otherwise
the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and
back page arrangement.
2
The factory default setting is the first setting (with the top of the document
at the top (toward the back of the machine)).
Document Loading Orientation
Using the original
glass
Icon
Description
Select this setting for a document
loaded with the top toward the
back of this machine.
1
1
1
1
Select this setting for a document
loaded with the top to the left
side of this machine.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-19
Basic copy operation
Using the ADF
Chapter 3
Note
Basic copy operation
3
To select an Original Direction setting
0 For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document”
on page 3-8.
Position the document to be copied.
2
In the Basics screen,
touch [Combine Originals].
Chapter 3
1
Basic copy operation
The Combine Originals
screen appears.
3
Touch [Original Direction].
The Original Direction
screen appears.
4
Select the document orientation. Touch the button for the orientation of
the loaded document,
and then touch [Enter].
–
3-20
To cancel the Original Direction setting,
touch [OFF].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)
When making single-sided copies of double-sided documents with a binding
margin, or when making double-sided copies of single-sided documents
with a binding margin, the position of the binding margin for the even-numbered pages can be adjusted.
2
Note
Chapter 3
As the factory default, “OFF” is selected for the Margin setting.
Document Binding Margin Position
Description
Select this setting if the document that is loaded has a binding margin on the
left.
• Single-sided copies of double-sided documents
DEF
ABC
DE
ABC
• Double-sided copies of single-sided documents
DEF
ABC
ABC
DE
Select this setting if the document that is loaded has a binding margin at the
top.
• Single-sided copies of double-sided documents
DEF
ABC
ABC
DEF
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-21
Basic copy operation
Icon
Basic copy operation
3
Icon
Description
• Double-sided copies of single-sided documents
DEF
ABC
ABC
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
DEF
3-22
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
To select a Margin setting
0 For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document”
on page 3-8.
Position the document to be copied.
–
2
When loading a document with a binding margin, position the top
of the document toward the back of the machine.
In the Basics screen,
touch [Combine Originals].
Chapter 3
1
3
Basic copy operation
The Combine Originals
screen appears.
Touch [Margin].
The Margin screen appears.
4
Select the binding margin position. Touch the
button for a left binding
margin or for a top binding margin, and then
touch [Enter].
–
To cancel the Margin
setting, touch [OFF].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-23
Basic copy operation
3
3.5
Selecting a Paper setting
The paper size can be selected automatically according to the document
size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the
corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings.
2
Note
Chapter 3
The factory default setting is “Auto Paper Select”.
Basic copy operation
As a factory default, the “Auto Zoom” setting and the “Auto Paper Select”
setting cannot both be selected at the same time. If the “Auto Paper Select” setting is selected while the “Auto Zoom” setting was selected, the
Zoom setting “×1.0” is selected.
However, the software switch settings can be used to allow the “Auto
Zoom” setting and the “Auto Paper Select” setting to be selected at the
same time. For details on the software switch settings, refer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on page 11-50.
Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting)
The size of the loaded document is detected, and copies are produced using
paper of the same size.
If the “×1.0” Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the document is selected.
If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds
to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
3-24
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
2
3
Chapter 3
Touch [Auto Paper Select].
!
If the document size cannot be detected, remove the document, and then
load it again.
If a document with an irregular size is loaded, specify the paper size manually. (Refer to “Manually selecting the desired paper size” on page 3-25.)
Manually selecting the desired paper size
The paper size can be specified for copying. By also selecting the “Auto
Zoom” setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size
of the loaded document and the specified paper size. For details on the “Auto Zoom” setting, refer to “Automatically selecting the zoom ratio (“Auto
Zoom” setting)” on page 3-27.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-25
Basic copy operation
Detail
Basic copy operation
3
Select the paper tray
loaded with the desired
paper.
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
2
3-26
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3.6
3
Specifying a Zoom setting
The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the document or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image.
The following procedures describe how to specify the Zoom setting.
2
As a factory default, the “Auto Zoom” setting and the “Auto Paper Select”
setting cannot both be selected at the same time. If the “Auto Zoom” setting is selected while the “Auto Paper Select” setting was selected, the
Paper screen appears. In the Paper screen, specify the desired Paper
setting.
However, the software switch settings can be used to allow the “Auto
Zoom” setting and the “Auto Paper Select” setting to be selected at the
same time. For details on the software switch settings, refer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on page 11-50.
Automatically selecting the zoom ratio (“Auto Zoom” setting)
The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size
of the loaded document and the specified paper size.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-27
Basic copy operation
The factory default setting is “×1.0”.
Chapter 3
Note
Basic copy operation
3
Touch [Auto Zoom].
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
2
3-28
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Specifying the same zoom ratio as the document (“×1.0” setting)
A copy that is the same size as the document (×1.000) is produced.
0 Touch
to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch
zoom ratio in ×0.001 increments.
1
to reduce the
In the Basics screen,
touch [Zoom].
Basic copy operation
2
Chapter 3
The Zoom screen appears.
Touch [×1.0].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-29
Basic copy operation
3
Slightly reducing the copy (“Minimal” setting)
A document image can be printed slightly smaller (×0.930) than the original
document size.
Chapter 3
0 The zoom ratio of the “Minimal” setting can be changed (between ×0.900
and ×0.999). For details on changing the zoom ratio for the “Minimal” setting or programming custom zoom ratios, refer to “Storing the desired
zoom ratio” on page 3-37.
0 Touch
to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch
to reduce the
zoom ratio in ×0.001 increments.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Zoom].
Basic copy operation
The Zoom screen appears.
2
3-30
Touch [Minimal].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Finely adjusting the zoom ratio
The zoom ratio can be finely increased or reduced in ×0.001 increments in
order to copy at the desired size.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Zoom].
2
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
The Zoom screen appears.
Adjust the zoom ratio.
–
–
–
Touch
to increase the zoom ratio, and touch
to reduce the zoom
ratio.
The zoom ratio is increased or reduced
in ×0.001 increments.
Hold down the button to change the
zoom ratio in larger increments.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-31
Basic copy operation
3
Selecting a preset zoom ratio (Enlarge and Reduce settings)
The most suitable zoom ratios for copying from common standard document
sizes to standard paper sizes are preset.
0 Touch
to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch
zoom ratio in ×0.001 increments.
1
to reduce the
In the Basics screen,
touch [Zoom].
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
The Zoom screen appears.
2
3-32
Touch the button for the
appropriate zoom ratio
according to the document and paper sizes.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Typing in the zoom ratio
By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between ×0.250 and ×4.000 can be typed
in directly without changing the height-to-width ratio.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Zoom].
2
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
The Zoom screen appears.
Touch [XY Zoom].
The XY Zoom screen appears.
3
Using the keypad, type
in the desired zoom ratio.
–
–
If a value outside the
allowable range is
specified, the message “Input Error”
appears. Type a value within the allowable range.
If the value was incorrectly entered,
press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the value, and then
specify the correct value.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-33
Basic copy operation
3
4
Touch [Enter].
The Zoom screen appears again.
!
Detail
The enter zoom ratio can be stored. For details on storing zoom ratios,
refer to “Storing the desired zoom ratio” on page 3-37.
Chapter 3
Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios (Individual
Zoom settings)
By using the keypad, separate zoom ratios can be typed in directly for the
horizontal direction (between ×0.250 and ×4.000) and for the vertical direction (between ×0.250 and ×4.000).
Basic copy operation
By changing the horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, the copy image can be
resized as shown in the following illustration.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
3-34
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
2
3
Touch [XY Zoom].
3
Chapter 3
The XY Zoom screen appears.
Touch [Individual Zoom].
4
Using the keypad, type
in the desired zoom ratios for side X and side Y
(between ×0.250 and
×4.000).
–
–
5
Basic copy operation
The Individual Zoom
screen appears.
If a value outside the
allowable range is
specified, the message “Input Error”
appears. Type a value within the allowable range.
If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the
keypad to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
Touch [Enter].
The Zoom screen appears again.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-35
Basic copy operation
3
Selecting a stored zoom ratio
Copy zoom ratios that have been stored can be recalled to be used when desired.
In addition, stored copy zoom ratios can be changed.
Chapter 3
0 Stored zoom ratios can be changed to desired zoom ratios. For details
on storing zoom ratios, refer to “Storing the desired zoom ratio” on
page 3-37.
0 The zoom ratios ×1.000, ×1.000 and ×0.930 have been stored.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Zoom].
Basic copy operation
The Zoom screen appears.
2
Touch [XY Zoom].
The XY Zoom screen appears.
3
3-36
Touch the button for the
desired zoom ratio.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
4
3
Touch [Enter].
The Zoom screen appears again.
Storing the desired zoom ratio
0 The zoom ratios ×1.000, ×1.000 and ×0.930 have been stored. When a
new zoom ratio is stored, it overwrites the zoom ratio stored with the selected button.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Zoom].
2
Basic copy operation
The Zoom screen appears.
Touch [XY Zoom].
The XY Zoom screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 3
Two frequently used zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the “Minimal” setting
can be stored.
3-37
Basic copy operation
3
3
Touch [Set Zoom].
Chapter 3
The Set Zoom screen
appears.
Basic copy operation
4
Using the keypad, type
in the desired zoom ratio
(between ×0.250 and
×4.000).
–
–
–
If a value outside the
allowable range is
specified, the message “Input Error”
appears. Type a value within the allowable range.
If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the
value, and then specify the correct value.
To store a “Minimal” zoom ratio, type in the desired zoom ratio between ×0.900 and ×0.999.
5
Touch the button or
[Minimal] where the new
zoom ratio is to be
stored.
6
Touch [Enter].
The XY Zoom screen appears again.
3-38
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3.7
3
Selecting single-/double-sided settings for originals
and copies
The following four combinations of the “Single-Sided” and “Double-Sided”
settings are available originals and copies.
Description
Single-Sided % Single-Sided
Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided documents.
Chapter 3
Original/copy settings
Single-Sided % Double-Sided
Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from
two single-sided documents.
1
Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from
one double-sided document.
2
1
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2
2
1
Double-Sided % Single-Sided
1
1
2
3-39
Basic copy operation
1
Basic copy operation
3
Original/copy settings
Description
Double-Sided % Double-Sided
Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from
double-sided documents.
Chapter 3
1
2
2
1
To select single-sided copies
Basic copy operation
0 As a factory default, the “Single-Sided” Original setting and the “SingleSided” Copy setting are selected.
0 If the “Double-Sided” Original setting and the “Single-Sided” Copy setting are selected, specify the position of the binding margin and the loading orientation for the document, otherwise the copies will not be printed
as desired. For details on specifying the position of the binding margin,
refer to “Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)” on
page 3-21. For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to
“Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)” on
page 3-19.
0 For details on using the original glass to scan multiple document pages,
refer to “Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass” on
page 3-14.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Simplex/Duplex].
The Simplex/Duplex
screen appears.
3-40
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
Select the single-sided
copy settings according
to the loaded document.
–
For a single-sided
document, touch
[Single-Sided] under
“Orig.” and [SingleSided] under “Copy”.
For a double-sided
document, touch
[Double-Sided] under “Orig.” and [Single-Sided] under “Copy”.
Chapter 3
–
To select double-sided copies
0 As a factory default, the “Single-Sided” Original setting and the “SingleSided” Copy setting are selected.
0 If the “Double-Sided” Copy setting is selected, specify the position of the
binding margin and the loading orientation for the document, otherwise
the copies will not be printed as desired.
For details on specifying the position of the binding margin, refer to “Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)” on
page 3-21.
For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to “Selecting the
document orientation (Original Direction settings)” on page 3-19.
0 For details on using the original glass to scan multiple document pages,
refer to “Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass” on
page 3-14.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Simplex/Duplex].
The Simplex/Duplex
screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-41
Basic copy operation
2
3
Basic copy operation
3
2
Select the double-sided
copy settings according
to the loaded document.
–
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
–
For a single-sided
document, touch
[Single-Sided] under
“Orig.” and [DoubleSided] under “Copy”.
For a double-sided
document, touch
[Double-Sided] under “Orig.” and [Double-Sided] under “Copy”.
3-42
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3.8
3
Specifying document quality/density settings
Select the setting for the text and image type of the document to better adjust the copy quality.
The following Quality/Density settings are available.
Document Quality Types
Select this setting when copying documents containing only
text.
The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness,
providing text that is easy to read.
Text
Select this setting when copying printed documents containing both text and images, such as pamphlets or catalogs.
Text & Photo
Photo
Select this setting when copying printed documents, such as
pamphlets or catalogs.
Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone document images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual copy settings.
Dot Matrix
Select this setting when copying documents containing only
text, where some of the text appears faint (such as that written with a pencil).
The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, making it
easier to read.
Density Adjustment
Icon
Description
The density can be adjusted to one of nine levels.
Each time [Dark] is touched, the density is darkened by one
level. Each time [Light] is touched, the density is lightened by
one level.
Select this setting to automatically adjust the density according to the document that is loaded.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-43
Chapter 3
Description
Basic copy operation
Icon
Basic copy operation
3
Specifying a document quality setting
0 The factory default setting is “Text & Photo”.
0 For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document”
on page 3-8.
Position the document to be copied.
2
In the Basics screen,
touch [Quality/Density].
Chapter 3
1
Basic copy operation
The Quality/Density
screen appears.
3
Touch the button for the
quality setting most appropriate for the loaded
document.
–
–
–
–
3-44
For a document that
contains only text,
touch [Text].
For a document that
contains both text
and photos, touch
[Text & Photo].
For a document that
contains photos, touch [Photo].
For a document that contains faint text, touch [Dot Matrix].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Adjusting the Copy Density (Density settings)
0 The default setting is the middle of the five levels. When the “Auto” setting is selected, the “Std.” Density setting is set.
0 The default Density setting and the density selected when the “Auto” setting is selected can be changed from the Utility mode. For details, refer
to “Default Copy Output Levels” on page 11-14.
In the Basics screen,
touch [Quality/Density].
Chapter 3
1
2
Basic copy operation
The Quality/Density
screen appears.
Select the desired Density setting.
–
–
Each time [Light] or
[Dark] is touched, the
density is lightened
or darkened by one
level.
Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the
density according to
the document that is
loaded.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-45
Basic copy operation
3
3.9
Selecting a Combine Originals setting
Multiple document pages (mainly 2, 4 or 8 pages) can be combined and
printed on a single page, reducing paper use.
2
Note
Chapter 3
The factory default settings are the recommended zoom ratios.
!
Detail
Basic copy operation
When a combined copy setting is selected, the recommended zoom ratio
is selected, and the document image is copied at a reduced size.
The recommended zoom ratios for each setting are listed below.
2-in-1: ×0.707
4-in-1: ×0.500
The machine can be set so that the recommended zoom ratios are not
recalled. For details, refer to “Zoom Ratio for Combine/Booklets” on
page 11-12.
When the “4 in 1” setting is selected, the page order (vertically or horizontally) can be selected. For details, refer to “4in1 Copy Order” on
page 11-14.
The following combined copies can be produced, depending on the Original
and Copy (“Single-Sided” and “Double-Sided”) settings selected in the Simplex/Duplex screen.
2
Note
Combined copying is also possible with multiples of document pages (3,
5, 6 or 7 pages) not shown in the illustrations.
3-46
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
Original/copy settings and description
2 in 1 (page 3-46)
Single-Sided % Single-Sided
Two single-sided documents is copied onto one double-sided
sheet.
Single-Sided % Double-Sided
Four single-sided documents are copied onto one double-sided sheet.
Double-Sided % Single-Sided
One double-sided document is copied onto one single-sided
sheet.
Double-Sided % Double-Sided
Two double-sided documents are copied onto one doublesided sheet.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-47
Basic copy operation
Setting
Chapter 3
3
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
3
Setting
Original/copy settings and description
4 in 1 (page 3-46)
Single-Sided % Single-Sided
Four single-sided documents are copied onto one single-sided sheet.
Basic copy operation
Single-Sided % Double-Sided
Eight single-sided documents are copied onto one doublesided sheet.
Double-Sided % Single-Sided
Two double-sided documents are copied onto one single-sided sheet.
Double-Sided % Double-Sided
Four double-sided documents are copied onto one doublesided sheet.
3-48
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Copying multiple document pages onto a single page (combined copy
settings)
In the Simplex/Duplex screen, select the appropriate settings under
“Orig.” and “Copy” for the desired combined copy. (For details, refer to
page 3-39.)
2
In the Basics screen,
touch [Combine Originals].
Chapter 3
1
3
Basic copy operation
The Combine Originals
screen appears.
Select the desired combined copy settings.
–
To cancel the setting,
touch the button
again to deselect it.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-49
Basic copy operation
3
3.10
Selecting finishing for copies
Various settings are available for sorting and finishing copies that are fed out.
2
Note
The factory default setting is “Non-Sort”.
Chapter 3
!
Detail
Basic copy operation
If no finisher is installed and the following conditions are met, printed
copies can be fed out and sorted/grouped in an alternating crisscross
pattern (crisscross sorting and crisscross grouping).
- Letter or 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 paper is used.
- Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one
paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray.
- The “Auto Paper Select” setting is selected.
- The “Mixed Original” setting is not selected.
- The “Cover Mode” and “Insert Sheet” functions are not set.
- The “Image Repeat” function is not set.
Select the “Booklet” function in the Book Copy/Repeat screen of the Application screen when center binding (“Crease” and “2 Staples” settings)
is set.
3-50
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
The following six finishing settings are available.
Description
Non-Sort
Select this setting to copy without using a Finishing setting.
Sort
Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page document.
1
14
3
2
1
Shift Sorting
Each set of copies is fed out shifted
to separate them.
1
1
4
Crisscross Sorting
Each set of copies is fed out in an
alternating crisscross pattern to
separate them.
3
1
1 43 1
1
2
2
1
Group
1
Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page
document.
4
3
21
1
1
1
Shift Grouping
The copies of each page are fed
out shifted to separate them.
4
3
1
1
4
2
1
Crisscross Grouping
The copies of each page are fed
out in an alternating crisscross pattern to separate them.
3 11 2
1
1
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
1
3-51
Basic copy operation
1
Chapter 3
Setting
Basic copy operation
3
Setting
Description
Corner Staple
Select this setting to bind the copies with a staple in the upper-left corner.
Chapter 3
1
2 Staples
Select this setting to bind the copies with two staples.
Basic copy operation
1
Center Binding
(“Crease” and “2
Staples” settings)
The copies are folded in half, then stapled at two places along the center.
Hole Punch
Holes are punched in the copies for filing them.
1
3-52
1
1
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Required options for the finishing settings
Non-Sort
-
Sort
-
Shift sorting
Finisher
Crisscross sorting
-*
Group
-
Shift grouping
Finisher
Crisscross grouping
-*
Corner Staple
Finisher
2 Staples
Finisher
Center binding
(“Crease” and “2
Staples” settings)
Finisher and saddle stitcher
Hole-Punch
Finisher and punch unit
Chapter 3
Required options
Basic copy operation
Setting
* Crisscross sorting and crisscross grouping are not available if a finisher is installed.
The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings.
Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting)
0 The factory default setting is “Non-Sort”.
0 If “Sort” is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed
out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern if the following conditions are met.
- Letter or 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 paper is used.
- Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one
paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray.
- The “Auto Paper Select” setting is selected.
- The “Mixed Original” setting is not selected.
- The “Cover Mode” and “Insert Sheet” functions are not set.
- The “Image Repeat” function is not set.
If “Sort” is selected and the finisher is installed, copies are fed out shifted
to separate them.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-53
Basic copy operation
3
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Finishing].
Chapter 3
The Finishing screen appears.
Touch [Sort].
Basic copy operation
2
Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting)
0 The factory default setting is “Non-Sort”.
0 If “Group” is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be
fed out and grouped in an alternating crisscross pattern if the following
conditions are met.
- Letter or 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 paper is used.
- Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one
paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray.
- The “Auto Paper Select” setting is selected.
- The “Mixed Original” setting is not selected.
If “Group” is selected and the finisher is installed, copies are fed out shifted to separate them.
3-54
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
1
3
In the Basics screen,
touch [Finishing].
2
Chapter 3
The Finishing screen appears.
Basic copy operation
Touch [Group].
Stapling copies (staple settings)
!
Detail
In order for copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be
met.
- The paper width must be between 7-1/4 inch and 11-3/4 inch
- The paper length must be between 5-1/2 inch and 17 inch
- If the “Mixed Original” setting is selected, all copies must be printed
with paper of the same width.
If a staple setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the
document is positioned. If an Original Direction setting is not selected,
the copies may not be stapled as desired.
For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to “Selecting the
document orientation (Original Direction settings)” on page 3-19.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-55
Basic copy operation
3
When finisher is installed
Paper Weight
15 lb to 24 lb
Paper Size
Loading Capacity (detected in either measurement)
Letter w/v
1,000 sheets
6 inch
11 × 17 w, Legal w
500 sheets
3 inch
Chapter 3
To bind copies with staples
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Finishing].
Basic copy operation
The Finishing screen appears.
2
Touch either [Corner
Staple] or [2 Staples].
–
–
–
–
3-56
If “Corner Staple” is
selected, the copies
are bound together
with a staple in the
upper-left corner.
If “2 Staples” is selected, [Position Setting] appears in the
screen. To select the
binding position,
continue with step 3.
If a staple setting is selected, the [Sort] setting is automatically selected.
To cancel the staple setting, touch [Corner Staple] or [2 Staples]
again to deselect it.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
3
Touch [Position Setting],
and then select the desired position.
4
Touch [Auto] to automatically determine
the binding position
according to the orientation of the loaded document.
Chapter 3
–
Touch [Enter].
Punching holes in copies (punch settings)
!
Detail
If a punch setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the
document is positioned. If an Original Direction setting is not selected,
holes may not be punched in the copies as desired. For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to “Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)” on page 3-19.
When finisher is installed
Paper Weight
Paper Size
16 lb to 24 lb
11 × 17 w, Letter w/v
To punch holes in copies
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-57
Basic copy operation
The Finishing screen appears again.
Basic copy operation
3
2
Touch [Hole-Punch].
Chapter 3
–
Basic copy operation
3
Touch [Position Setting],
and then select the desired position.
–
4
To cancel the punch
setting, touch [HolePunch] again to
deselect it.
Touch [Auto] to automatically determine
the position of the
punched holes according to the orientation of the loaded
document.
Touch [Enter].
The Finishing screen appears again.
3-58
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3
Binding copies at the center
Bound copy
(folded in half and stapled
at two places)
Paper Weight
Paper Size
Number of Bound Pages
15 lb to 24 lb
Letter w, 11 × 17 w
2 to 15 sheets
To bind copies at the center
0 For details on specifying the “Booklet” function, refer to “Creating booklet copies (“Booklet” function)” on page 8-22.
0 The position of the fold and the center staples can be adjusted from the
Utility mode. For details, refer to “Crease/Center Staple” on page 11-17.
1
Select the “Booklet” function in the Book Copy/Repeat screen of the
Application screen.
2
In the Basics screen,
touch [Finishing].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-59
Basic copy operation
Document
(“Booklet” function
is set.)
Chapter 3
Copies can be fed out folded in half and stapled at two places along the center.
Basic copy operation
3
3
The Finishing screen appears.
Touch [2 Staples] and
[Crease].
Chapter 3
–
4
To cancel center
binding, touch [2
Staples] and [Crease]
again to deselect
them.
Touch [Enter].
Basic copy operation
The Basics screen appears again.
3-60
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3.11
3
Scanning the next document during printing (reserving a copy job)
The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the document can be
scanned while a copy operation is being performed so that it can be printed
once the current copy operation is finished.
1
Press the [Start] key to
begin scanning and
printing the current copy
job.
A message appears, indicating that the document is being scanned.
2
When the message
“Ready to accept another job.” appears, copy
settings can be specified
for the next copy job.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-61
Basic copy operation
0 A copy job can be reserved only if optional hard disk is installed.
0 Up to 5 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be queued.
0 A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded document is finished.
0 A copy job cannot be reserved while a document is being scanned.
0 For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document”
on page 3-8.
0 To stop the job being printed, press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to
“Stopping/deleting a job” on page 3-63.
In addition, the job can be deleted from the Job List screen. For details,
refer to “To delete a job” on page 4-25.
Chapter 3
To reserve a copy job
Basic copy operation
3
Press the [Start] key.
4
After the current copy job is finished, the next copy job begins.
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
3
3-62
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Basic copy operation
3.12
3
Stopping/deleting a job
The following procedure describes how to stop scanning the document, stop
the printing operation and delete the copy job.
To stop/delete a copy job
Press the [Stop] key
while a document is being scanned or a job is
being printed.
Stop
Start
Basic copy operation
1
Chapter 3
0 If a document is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key stops
scanning and printing.
After the message
“Copy cycle temporarily
suspended.” appears,
scanning and printing
stops.
The Stop screen appears.
2
Perform the desired operation.
–
–
To delete a stopped or queued job, touch the button for the job to
be deleted. The job is deleted.
To continue the stopped job, press the [Start] key.
!
Detail
A job can also be deleted from the Job List screens. For details, refer to
“To delete a job” on page 4-25.
A function other than a copy function cannot be selected while pages are
being scanned for copying, while copy scanning is paused, or while printing is paused.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
3-63
Basic copy operation
Basic copy operation
Chapter 3
3
3-64
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 4
Additional copy
operations
Additional copy operations
4
Additional copy operations
4
4
Additional copy operations
4.1
Checking the copy settings (Mode Check)
From the Check Job Details screens, the current copy settings can be
checked and changed if desired.
To check the settings
1
Press the [Mode Check]
key.
Additional copy operations
Chapter 4
Mode Check
4-2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4
Additional copy operations
Chapter 4
The Check Job Details
screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-3
Additional copy operations
4
Chapter 4
2
After checking the settings, touch [Exit] or press the [Mode Check] key
again.
The Basics screen appears again.
!
Additional copy operations
Detail
There are four Check Job Details screens. The number of the currently
displayed screen appears to the right of the screen title.
To display the previous screen, touch [Back]. To display the next screen,
touch [Fwd].
If the setting for a function has been changed from the default, the button
for that function appears selected.
To change the settings
1
Press the [Mode Check] key.
2
Touch [Back] or [Fwd] until the button for the function to be changed is
displayed.
3
Touch the button for the function whose setting is to be changed.
The screen for specifying the setting appears.
4
4-4
Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4.2
4
Printing a sample to check the settings (Proof Copy)
Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can be printed
to be checked. This prevents copy errors from occurring.
To make test prints
Position the document to be copied. (Refer to page 3-8 for details.)
The “Proof Copy” function can be used only if the machine has
been set for 2 or more copies.
2
Select the desired copy settings.
3
Press the [Proof Copy]
key.
A single proof copy is
printed.
4
Proof Copy
Check the proof copy.
–
–
5
Chapter 4
–
Additional copy operations
1
If the proof copy was printed as desired, skip to step 8.
To change the copy settings, continue with step 5.
Touch [Change Setting]
in the screen that appeared when the proof
copy was printed.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-5
Additional copy operations
4
6
In the Proof copy screen,
change the copy settings as desired.
Chapter 4
–
7
Press the [Proof Copy]
key to print another
proof copy.
Additional copy operations
–
–
8
The Finishing settings appear in the
Proof copy screen
only if they have
been specified for
the job being
proofed. If the copy
settings cannot be
changed, stop printing the proof copy. Next, press the [Reset] key to cancel the copy
settings, and then specify the desired settings.
If copying stops
while the Proof copy
screen is displayed
or while changing
settings after the
proof copy was printed, press the [Reset]
key. A screen for
stopping the job appears. Select the job to be deleted to delete the job.
To stop the proof copy while scanning or printing, perform the operation described in “Stopping/deleting a job” on page 3-63.
Press the [Start] key.
The specified copy settings are queued as a job.
2
Note
The number of copies printed for the proof copy is included in the number
of copies that are specified. If the setting was changed, use the keypad
to enter the number copies.
4-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4.3
4
Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)
The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so a document can be copied with different copy settings.
To interrupt a copy job
1
Position the document to be copied. (Refer to page 3-8 for details.)
2
Press the [Interrupt] key.
–
Chapter 4
Interrupt
What happens if the [Interrupt] key is pressed while a document is
being scanned?
% Pressing the [Interrupt] key returns all copy settings, except the
number of copies, to their defaults.
?
3
Select the desired copy settings.
4
Press the [Start] key.
Printing begins for the job that the previous job was interrupted for.
5
After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key.
The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off.
The copy settings return to those specified before printing was interrupted.
2
Note
If the interrupting job is cancelled, printing for the interrupted job automatically restarts.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-7
Additional copy operations
If a job is being printed, the message
“Job is stopping.”
appears.
The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in
green and printing of the
current job stops.
Additional copy operations
4
4.4
Registering copy programs (Mode Memory)
Up to 10 copy programs can be registered.
The registered copy programs can be recalled and used for copying.
To register a copy program
1
Using the touch panel and control panel keys, specify the copy settings
to be registered in the copy program.
?
%
Chapter 4
2
Can the current settings be checked?
To check the currently specified copy settings, press the [Mode
Check] key.
Press the [Mode Memory] key.
Additional copy operations
The Program screen appears.
3
4-8
Mode Memory
Touch [Set].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4
4
Touch the button for the program number where a program is to be
registered.
If a program has not yet been registered with the program number
button that is pressed, the empty icon disappears from the number
button to indicate that a program is registered with it.
Program registered
–
If a program has already been registered with the
program number
button that is
pressed, a message
appears, requesting
confirmation to overwrite the program. To
overwrite the program, touch [Yes],
and then touch [Enter]. To cancel the registration, touch [No], and then touch [Enter].
What if programs have already been registered to all of the program
numbers?
% If there are no program numbers where no program has been registered yet, the program registered at a program number will be
overwritten. To check the copy program settings before overwriting
it, refer to “Checking the copy settings (Mode Check)” on page 4-2.
?
!
Detail
To stop registering the program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key. No matter which screen is displayed, the registration is cancelled.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-9
Chapter 4
No program registered
Additional copy operations
–
Additional copy operations
4
To recall a copy program
The registered copy programs can be recalled and used for copying.
1
Position the document to be copied. (Refer to page 3-8 for details.)
2
Press the [Mode Memory] key.
Mode Memory
Chapter 4
The Program screen appears.
Additional copy operations
3
Touch [Recall].
–
To stop recalling a
copy program, press
the [Reset] key or the
[Mode Memory] key.
Can the specified
settings for a copy
program be
checked?
% To check the program copy settings
before recalling the copy program, refer to “Checking the copy settings (Mode Check)” on page 4-2.
?
4
Touch the button for the program number registered with the desired
copy settings.
The program copy settings are recalled, and the Basics screen appears
again.
–
5
If [Enter] is touched without touching a program number button, the
Basics screen appears again and no copy program is recalled.
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins with the recalled copy settings.
4-10
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4
To checking the copy settings
The copy settings to be registered as a copy program can be checked.
Press the [Mode Memory] key.
2
Touch [Check].
3
Touch the program
number button registered with the copy settings to be checked.
Mode Memory
Chapter 4
The Program screen appears.
Additional copy operations
1
The Check Program
screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-11
Additional copy operations
4
4
Check the copy settings registered with the selected program number.
–
5
The program whose copy settings are being checked in the Check
Program screen can be recalled. Touch [Recall] to recall the registered copy settings and display the Basics screen again.
Touch [Enter].
The Program screen appears again.
!
Detail
There are three Check Program screens. Touch [Fwd] to display the next
screen, or touch [Back] to display the previous screen.
Chapter 4
The copy settings cannot be changed from the Program Check screens.
To delete a registered copy program
Registered copy programs can be deleted.
Additional copy operations
1
Press the [Mode Memory] key.
The Program screen appears.
2
4-12
Mode Memory
Touch [Delete].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
3
4
Touch the program
number button registered with the copy settings to be deleted.
A message appears, requesting confirmation to
delete the copy program.
Touch [Yes], and then touch [Enter]. To stop deleting the copy program, touch [No], and then touch [Enter].
Chapter 4
4
Additional copy operations
The Program screen appears again.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-13
Additional copy operations
4
4.5
Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode)
This section contains details on the procedures for specifying control panel
settings and adjusting the touch panel.
To display the Accessibility Settings screen
1
Press the [Accessibility]
key.
Additional copy operations
Chapter 4
Accessibility
The Accessibility Settings screen appears.
2
Touch the button for the Accessibility function whose setting is to be
changed.
The screen for the selected function appears.
4-14
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4
!
Detail
To return to the Basics screen from the Accessibility Settings screen,
press the [Accessibility] key or the [Reset] key, or touch [Enter], [Set] or
[Reset].
If [Reset] in the Accessibility Settings screen is touched to return to the
Basics screen, the settings specified in the Accessibility Settings screen
are not applied, and the Basics screen is reset to its factory default settings.
To set the “Screen Mode” function
Select whether the screens appear in the touch panel in black on white or in
white on black.
Chapter 4
If [Set] or [Enter] in the Accessibility Settings screen is touched to return
to the Basics screen, the Basics screen is displayed with the settings
specified in the Accessibility Settings screen applied.
1
Display the Accessibility Settings screen. (For details, refer to
page 4-14.)
2
Touch [Screen Mode].
Additional copy operations
0 The factory default setting is “Normal Screen”.
The Screen Mode screen appears.
3
Select the setting for the
desired touch panel display.
–
–
4
Touch [Inverted
Screen] to specify
that the screens appear in the touch
panel in white on
black.
Touch [Normal
Screen] to return the
touch panel to its
original display.
Touch [Enter].
The Accessibility Settings screen appears again.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-15
Additional copy operations
4
To set the “Key Speed Settings” function
It is possible to specify the length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down and the length of time for the value to
change to the next number.
0 The factory default setting for “Time to Start” is 0.3 second, and the factory default setting for “Interval” is 0.1 second.
1
Display the Accessibility Settings screen. (For details, refer to
page 4-14.)
2
Touch [Key Speed Settings].
The Key Speed Settings screen appears.
Additional copy operations
Chapter 4
3
Touch
and
to
specify the starting time
and the interval for the
key repeat feature.
The starting time and the
interval for the key repeat feature specify the
speed at which a value
changes when
or
is held down to
change a setting.
Interval
Starting time
How are the specified time settings checked?
% Touch [CHECK] to check the specified key repeat settings.
?
4
Touch [Enter].
The Accessibility Settings screen appears again.
4-16
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4
To set the “Extend Auto Reset” function
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, an automatic panel
reset operation is performed and all settings in the touch panel return to their
default settings. It is possible to specify the length of time that a confirmation
screen is displayed before the settings return to their defaults.
0 For details on the automatic panel reset operation, refer to “Automatically
returning to the default settings (Automatic panel reset)” on page 2-27.
0 The factory default setting is “OFF”.
1
Display the Accessibility Settings screen. (For details, refer to
page 4-14.)
2
Touch [Extend Auto Reset].
3
Chapter 4
The Extend Auto Reset screen appears.
–
–
4
Additional copy operations
Select the setting for the
desired length of time
that the confirmation
screen is displayed.
Touch [30 sec.], [60
sec.], [90 sec.] or
[120 sec.].
To reset the settings
to their defaults without displaying a confirmation screen,
touch [OFF].
Touch [Enter].
The Accessibility Settings screen appears again.
!
Detail
The operations where the machine enters Low Power mode or Sleep
mode or where the touch panel is darkened are not affected by the time
specified for the “Extend Auto Reset” function. When specifying a time
for the “Extend Auto Reset” function, specify a time shorter than that for
entering Low Power mode or Sleep mode or for darkening the touch panel.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-17
Additional copy operations
4
To set the “Notification Screen” function
It is possible to specify the length of time that the screen is displayed to confirm the reception number or job ID after copying is finished.
0 The factory default setting is “3 sec.”.
1
Display the Accessibility Settings screen. (For details, refer to
page 4-14.)
2
Touch [Notification Screen].
The Notification Screen screen appears.
Chapter 4
3
Select the setting for the
desired length of time
that the notification
screen is displayed.
–
Additional copy operations
–
4
Touch [3 sec.], [10
sec.] or [60 sec.].
To display the notification screen until
[Enter] is touched,
touch [No Limit].
Touch [Enter].
The Accessibility Settings screen appears again.
4-18
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4
To set the “Sound Setting” function
It is possible to specify the volumes of the tone that is sounded when a touch
panel button is touched and of the alarm that is sounded when a malfunction
occurs.
0 The factory default setting is “Normal”.
1
Display the Accessibility Settings screen. (For details, refer to
page 4-14.)
2
Touch [Sound Setting].
Touch [Normal] or
[Loud].
4
Touch [Enter].
Additional copy operations
3
Chapter 4
The Sound Setting screen appears.
The Accessibility Settings screen appears again.
2
Note
The volume of the tone produced when a control panel key is pressed or
when an alarm is sounded can also be changed from the Utility mode. For
details, refer to “Tone volume parameters” on page 11-20.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-19
Additional copy operations
4
To set the “Key Sound Tones” function
It is possible to specify the tone of the sound produced when a touch panel
button is touched and of the alarm that is sounded when a malfunction occurs.
0 The factory default setting is “High”.
1
Display the Accessibility Settings screen. (For details, refer to
page 4-14.)
2
Touch [Key Sound Tones].
The Key Sound Tones screen appears.
Touch [Low], [Normal] or
[High].
4
Touch [Enter].
Additional copy operations
Chapter 4
3
The Accessibility Settings screen appears again.
4-20
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4.6
4
Job List screens
Jobs
Specifying the desired copy settings, then pressing the [Start] key queues
the copy operation in this machine. This queued operation is called a job. In
the same way, operations for making scans and computer printouts are also
queued as jobs.
- Jobs that are being performed and jobs that are queued can be checked
or deleted from the Job List screens.
- Jobs are printed starting with the one at the top of the Print Order list.
While one job is being printed, another job can be queued. A maximum of 5
copy jobs can be queued.
When one job is finished being printed, the next queued print job automatically begins.
Chapter 4
Multi-job feature
Additional copy operations
Job List screens
In the Job List screen, the following tabs for various specific functions can
be displayed.
- Job: Lists the operations that are being performed
- Print Order: Lists the order of documents that are being copied or printed
or waiting to be copied or printed
- Print: Lists the print status of documents being copied or printed
- Type: Used in Fax mode
- Doc.: Used in Fax mode and Box mode
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-21
Additional copy operations
4
!
Detail
For details on the Com. tab of the Job List screen, refer to the User’s
Guide [Facsimile Operations].
Additional copy operations
Chapter 4
For details on the Doc. tab of the Job List screen, refer to the User’s
Guide [Facsimile Operations] and the User’s Guide [Box Operations].
4-22
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4.7
4
Performing operations on jobs
To check a job being performed
1
Touch [Job List].
2
Chapter 4
The Job List screen appears.
Check the job being performed.
–
Touch
and
to display a different screen.
A maximum of 8 jobs
being performed can
be displayed.
Additional copy operations
–
!
Detail
A job being performed or a job waiting to be performed, such as a queued
job, can be deleted. For details, refer to “To delete a job” on page 4-25.
In addition, the job can be deleted after the [Stop] key is pressed. For details, refer to “Stopping/deleting a job” on page 3-63.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-23
Additional copy operations
4
To check the printing order
1
Touch [Job List].
Additional copy operations
Chapter 4
The Job List screen appears.
2
Touch [Print Order].
3
Check the printing order.
–
–
Touch
and
to display a different screen.
The printing order for
a maximum of 8 jobs
can be displayed.
!
Detail
A job being performed or a job waiting to be performed, such as a queued
job, can be deleted. For details, refer to “To delete a job” on page 4-25.
In addition, the job can be deleted after the [Stop] key is pressed. For details, refer to “Stopping/deleting a job” on page 3-63.
4-24
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Additional copy operations
4
To delete a job
A job being performed or a job waiting to be performed can be deleted.
1
Touch [Job List].
2
Chapter 4
The Job List screen appears.
Select the job that you wish to delete.
If the job that you
wish to delete is not
displayed,
touch
and
until the desired job
is displayed.
The screen for deleting
the selected job appears.
3
Additional copy operations
–
Check the information
that is displayed, and
then touch [Delete].
The selected job is deleted.
4
Touch [OK].
The Job List screen appears again.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
4-25
Additional copy operations
4
!
Detail
Additional copy operations
Chapter 4
A job can also be deleted after the [Stop] key is pressed. For details, refer
to “Stopping/deleting a job” on page 3-63.
4-26
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
5
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
5
5
Troubleshooting
5.1
When the message “Malfunction detected.” appears
(Call technical representative)
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
If a malfunction that cannot be corrected by the user occurred, the message
“Malfunction detected. Please call your Technical Representative.” appears.
(call technical representative screen)
5-2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
5
To correct the error
Write down the malfunction code (for example, C-0001) in the call technical representative screen.
2
Turn the machine off by using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key and the
main power switch.
3
Unplug the machine.
4
Contact the technical representative, and inform them of the malfunction code.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
1
2
Reminder
Since the machine may be damaged, contact the technical representative according to the procedure described above as soon as the call technical representative screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-3
Troubleshooting
5
5.2
When the message “Misfeed detected.” appears
If a misfeed occurs during copying or printing, the message “Misfeed detected.” appears and the location of the misfeed is indicated in the screen. (misfeed screen)
At this time, copying and printing cannot continue until the misfeed is adequately cleared.
Location of paper misfeed
Chapter 5
“×” indicates the location of the paper misfeed. In addition, a lit “o” indicates
areas where paper may have been misfed and that should be checked.
Example: Screen when a paper misfeed occurs in a paper tray
Troubleshooting
2
Note
The procedure for clearing misfed paper differs depending on where the
misfeed occurs. Determine the misfeed location by looking at the illustration displayed with the error message, and then clear the misfeed according to the appropriate procedure.
5-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
5
Paper misfeed indications
1
2 5
3
4
6
8
10
Troubleshooting
9
Chapter 5
7
No.
Description
1
A paper misfeed in the ADF (page 5-6)
2
A paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit (page 5-12)
A paper misfeed in the 1st tray (page 5-15)
3
A paper misfeed in the fusing unit (page 5-8)
4
A paper misfeed in the bypass tray (page 5-13)
5
A paper misfeed in the 2nd tray (page 5-15)
6
A paper misfeed in the 3rd or 4th tray (page 5-17)
7
A paper misfeed in the LCT (page 5-18)
8
A paper misfeed in the finisher (page 5-19)
9
A paper misfeed in the mailbin kit (page 5-22)
10
A paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher (page 5-24)
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-5
Troubleshooting
5
To clear a paper misfeed in the ADF
Pull up the lever for the
misfeed-clearing cover, and then open the
cover.
2
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper.
3
Swing up the document guide lever.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
1
5-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5
Turn the dial to feed
out any misfed documents.
5
While supporting the
document feed tray
with your right hand,
carefully pull out any
misfed documents.
6
Return the document guide lever to its original position, and then close
the misfeed-clearing cover.
Chapter 5
4
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed indications” on page 5-5.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-7
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
5
To clear a paper misfeed in the fusing unit
1
Pull up the right-side
door release lever, and
then open the rightside door.
7 CAUTION
Chapter 5
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
%Touching any part other than those indicated may result in
burns. If you get burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold
water, and then seek professional medical attention.
Troubleshooting
Fusing unit
5-8
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper.
3
Decreased copy
quality may result if
the surface of the
image transfer roller is touched. Be
careful not to
touch the surface
of the image transfer roller.
Image
transfer
roller
Chapter 5
–
Troubleshooting
2
5
Open the fusing unit
guide.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-9
Troubleshooting
5
Carefully remove any
misfed paper.
5
Open the switching
guide, and then carefully pull out any misfed paper in the
switchback unit.
6
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper in the
fusing section.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
4
5-10
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper around
the image transfer roller.
8
Carefully remove any
misfed paper.
9
Close the right-side door.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
7
5
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed indications” on page 5-5.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-11
Troubleshooting
5
2
Reminder
If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your technical representative.
- The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit.
- The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit.
- The paper that was removed tore and partly remains in the fusing unit.
To clear a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit
Open the automatic
duplex unit door.
2
Carefully pull out any misfed paper.
3
Close the automatic duplex unit door.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
1
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed indications” on page 5-5.
5-12
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
5
Remove all paper from
the bypass tray.
2
If misfed paper cannot
be pulled out, pull the
lever for the sliding
plate of the bypass
tray, and then pull the
sliding plate toward
you.
Troubleshooting
1
Chapter 5
To clear a paper misfeed in the bypass tray
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-13
Troubleshooting
5
3
Press down on the
sliding plate with your
left hand and carefully
pull out any misfed paper.
4
Return the bypass tray to its original position.
!
Chapter 5
Detail
Troubleshooting
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed indications” on page 5-5.
5-14
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
5
Open the bypass tray.
2
Pull up the lower rightside door release lever, and then open the
lower right-side door
of the paper feed unit
indicated in the touch
panel message.
Troubleshooting
1
Chapter 5
To clear a paper misfeed in the 1st or 2nd tray
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-15
Troubleshooting
5
3
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper.
4
Close the lower right-side door.
5
Close the bypass tray.
Chapter 5
!
Detail
Troubleshooting
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed indications” on page 5-5.
5-16
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
5
To clear a paper misfeed in the 3rd or 4th tray
Pull up the lower rightside door release lever, and then open the
lower right-side door
of the paper feed unit.
2
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper.
3
Close the lower right-side door.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
1
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed indications” on page 5-5.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-17
Troubleshooting
5
To clear a paper misfeed in the LCT
Pull up the lower rightside door release lever, and then open the
lower right-side door
of the paper feed unit.
2
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper.
3
Close the lower right-side door.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
1
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed indications” on page 5-5.
5-18
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
5
Open the front door.
2
Lower lever FN1, and
then pull out any misfed paper.
FN1
Troubleshooting
1
Chapter 5
To clear a paper misfeed in the finisher
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-19
Troubleshooting
5
3
Turn dial FN2.
FN2
If the punch unit is installed, pull out the
hole-punch waste
container.
5
Lower lever FN3, and
then pull out any misfed paper.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
4
FN3
5-20
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
5
6
Return levers FN1 and FN3 to their original positions.
7
If the punch unit is installed, insert the hole-punch waste container into
its original position.
8
Lower lever FN4.
9
Turn dial FN5 or dial
FN6, and then pull out
any misfed paper.
Chapter 5
FN4
FN5
Troubleshooting
FN6
10
Return lever FN4 to its original position.
11
Close the front door.
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed indications” on page 5-5.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-21
Troubleshooting
5
To clear a paper misfeed in the mailbin kit
Open the front door.
2
Turn dial FN5 or dial
FN6 to feed out any
misfed paper.
Chapter 5
1
FN5
Troubleshooting
FN6
3
While pressing down
lever FN7, pull out any
misfed paper.
FN7
5-22
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
4
5
Pull handle FN8 to
open the misfeedclearing door.
FN8
Pull out any misfed paper in the mailbin.
6
Close the misfeed-clearing door.
7
Close the front door.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
5
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed indications” on page 5-5.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-23
Troubleshooting
5
Chapter 5
To clear a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher
1
Open the front door.
2
Turn dial FN5 or dial
FN6 to feed out any
misfed paper.
FN5
Troubleshooting
FN6
5-24
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
Remove all paper from
the output tray.
4
Open the misfeedclearing door, and
then pull out any misfed paper.
5
Close the misfeed-clearing door.
6
Close the front door.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
3
5
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed indications” on page 5-5.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-25
Troubleshooting
5
5.3
When the message “Replenish paper.” appears
If a tray has run out of paper while copying or after printing, the message
“Replenish paper.” appears.
To replenish paper
%
Check which paper tray appears highlighted in the touch panel, and
then load it with paper.
Chapter 5
!
Detail
Troubleshooting
For details on loading paper into the paper trays, refer to “Loading paper
into the 1st or 2nd tray” on page 2-54, “Loading paper into the LCT” on
page 2-57, and “Loading paper into the bypass tray” on page 2-60.
5-26
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
5.4
5
When the message “... Not enough remaining memory.” appears
This machine uses the memory to produce copies.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
Since the amount of memory available is limited, the message “The job has
been deleted. Not enough remaining memory.” appears and the scanned job
is deleted if the memory becomes full while scanning a document.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-27
Troubleshooting
5
5.5
When the message “Please exchange toner.” appears
When there is very little toner remaining, the message “Please exchange toner.” appears.
!
Detail
After the message “Please exchange toner.” appears, about 500 (Letter)
pages can be printed.
Chapter 5
When the message appears, prepare to replace the toner bottle according to your maintenance agreement. When the message “There is no
Toner.” appears, the machine stops operating.
Troubleshooting
When the toner has run out
When the toner bottle is empty, the message shown below appears. Immediately replace the toner bottle.
!
Detail
For details on replacing the toner bottle, refer to “Replacing the toner bottle” on page 9-2.
5-28
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
5.6
5
When the message “Stapler empty.” appears
When the staple cartridge is empty, the message “Stapler empty.” appears.
Replace the staple cartridge.
Example: Message when the finisher has run out of staples
Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears,
otherwise the machine may be damaged.
!
Detail
For details on replacing the staple cartridge, refer to “Replacing the staple cartridge” on page 9-7.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-29
Troubleshooting
Reminder
Chapter 5
2
Troubleshooting
5
5.7
Basic troubleshooting
Main
Unit
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
The machine does not
start up when the main
power switch is turned on.
Is no power supplied
from the electrical outlet?
Correctly insert the power
supply plug into the electrical outlet.
Has the [Power] (auxiliary
power) key been turned
on?
Turn on the [Power] (auxiliary
power) key.
Is the right-side door of
the machine open?
Securely close the right-side
door of the machine.
Is there no paper that
matches the document?
Load paper of the appropriate size into the paper tray.
Is the copy density set
too light?
Touch [Dark] in the Density
screen to copy at the desired
copy density.
(See page 3-45.)
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new
paper. (See page 2-54,
page 2-57 and page 2-60.)
Is the copy density set
too dark?
Touch [Light] in the Density
screen to copy at the desired
copy density. (See
page 3-45.)
Was the document not
pressed close enough
against the original
glass?
Position the document so
that it is pressed closely
against the original glass.
(See page 3-10.)
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new
paper. (See page 2-54,
page 2-57 and page 2-60.)
Was the document not
pressed close enough
against the original
glass?
Position the document so
that it is pressed closely
against the original glass.
(See page 3-10.)
Is the original glass dirty?
Wipe the glass with a soft,
dry cloth. (See page 10-3.)
Is the document transfer
belt dirty?
Clean the document transfer
belt with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent.
Was the original document printed on highly
translucent material,
such as diazo photosensitive paper or overhead
projector transparencies?
Place a blank sheet of paper
on top of the document.
(page 3-10.)
Copying does not start.
Chapter 5
The printed output is too
light.
Troubleshooting
The printed output is too
dark.
The printed output is blurry.
There are dark specks or
spots throughout the
printed output.
There are streaks in the
printed output.
5-30
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
The image is not aligned
properly on the paper.
The printed page is curled.
Possible cause
Remedy
Is a double-sided document being copied?
If a thin double-sided document is being copied, the
print on the back side may
be reproduced in the copy.
Select the “Dot Matrix” Density setting. (See page 3-43.)
Is the document incorrectly positioned?
Correctly position the document against the document
scales. (See page 3-10.)
Load the document into the
ADF, and slide the adjustable document guides to fit
the size of the document.
(See page 3-8.)
Is the document incorrectly positioned in the
ADF?
If the document cannot be
fed correctly through the
ADF, make copies by positioning the document on the
original glass. (See
page 3-10.)
Is the original glass dirty
(while using the ADF)?
Wipe the glass with a soft,
dry cloth. (See page 10-3.)
Are the adjustable document guides incorrectly
positioned against the
edges of the document?
Slide the adjustable document guides against the
edges of the document.
Was curled paper loaded
into the paper tray?
Flatten the paper before
loading it.
Was paper that curls
easily (as with recycled
paper) used?
Remove the paper from the
paper tray, turn it over, and
then load it again.
Replace the paper with paper that is not damp.
The edge of the printed
output is dirty.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Is the document pad
dirty?
Clean the document transfer
belt with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent.
(See page 10-5.)
Was the selected paper
size larger than the document (with a Zoom setting of “×1.0”)?
Select a paper size that is
the same size as the document.
Otherwise, select the “Auto
Zoom” setting to enlarge the
copy to the selected paper
size. (See page 3-27.)
Is the orientation of the
document different from
the orientation of the paper (with a Zoom setting
of “×1.0”)?
Select a paper size that is
the same size as the document. Otherwise, select a
paper orientation that is the
same as that of the document.
5-31
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Chapter 5
5
Troubleshooting
5
Chapter 5
Symptom
Troubleshooting
ADF
Finisher
Possible cause
Remedy
Was the copy reduced to
a size smaller than the
paper (with a reduced
zoom ratio specified)?
Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the document size to
the selected paper size. (See
page 3-27.)
Otherwise, select the “Auto
Zoom” setting to reduce the
copy to the selected paper
size. (See page 3-27.)
Even though the paper
misfeed was cleared, copies cannot be produced.
Are there paper misfeeds
at other locations?
Check the touch panel for
other paper misfeed indications, and then remove any
misfed paper at all other locations. (See page 5-5.)
Printing with the “DoubleSided” % “Single-Sided”
or “Double-Sided” %
“Double-Sided” settings
are not possible.
Have settings been selected that cannot be
combined?
Check the combinations of
the selected settings.
Copying is not possible
even though the password
is entered on a machine
with user authentication/
account track set.
Did the message “Account has reached its
maximum copy allowance.” appear?
Contact your administrator.
The document is not fed.
Is the ADF slightly open?
Securely close the ADF.
Is the document one that
does not meet the specifications?
Check that the document is
correctly placed on the original glass.
Is the document correctly loaded?
Position the document correctly. (See page 3-8.)
The finisher cannot be
used.
Is no power supplied to
the connector?
Check that the cord is correctly inserted into the connector.
The pages cannot be stapled.
Have the staples run
out?
Replace the staple cartridge.
(See page 9-7.)
The staple is incorrectly
positioned by 90 degrees.
Is the staple position correctly specified?
Specify the desired stapling
position. (See page 3-55.)
The pages that were fed
out were not uniformly
loaded and the punched
holes or staples are incorrectly positioned.
Is the paper curled?
Remove the paper from the
paper tray, turn it over, and
then load it again.
Is there a gap between
the lateral guides in the
paper tray and the sides
of the paper?
Slide the lateral guides in the
paper tray against the sides
of the paper so that there is
no gap.
Even though a Punch setting was selected, holes
are not punched. (when
punch unit is installed on
finisher)
Did the message “Remove punch scraps.” appear?
Empty the hole-punch waste
container.
If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation
described in the message.
5-32
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
5
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed,
contact your technical representative.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-33
Troubleshooting
5
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
5.8
5-34
Main messages and their remedies
Message
Possible cause
Remedy
Original left on glass.
The document was left
on the original glass.
Remove the document from
the original glass.
Original size cannot be detected.
Select paper size.
ΠThe document is not
positioned correctly.
 A document with a
non-standard size or with
a size too small to be detected is loaded.
ΠPosition the document correctly.
 Select the correct paper
size.
This mode cannot be set with XXX.
Functions that cannot be
used together are selected.
Make copies using only one of
the functions.
The Exit Tray has reached its maximum capacity. Please remove all
copies from the tray as indicated
by the arrow(s).
Since the maximum
amount of copies for the
indicated finisher output
tray has been exceeded,
the machine is unable to
make copies.
Remove all copies from the indicated tray.
Input User Name and Password to
login.
User authentication settings have been specified. Copies cannot be
made unless a user name
and its correct password
are entered.
Type in your user name and
password. (See “Controlling
machine use with user authentication (machine authentication)” on page 2-30.)
Input Account Name and Password to login.
Account track settings
have been specified.
Copies cannot be made
unless an account name
and its correct password
are entered.
Type in your account name
and password. (See “Limiting
user access with account
track” on page 2-37.)
Account has reached its maximum
copy allowance. Please call your
administrator
The limit on the number
of pages that can be
printed has been
reached.
Contact your administrator.
Properly close the section(s) indicated by the arrow(s)
Since a machine door or
cover is open or an option is not installed correctly, the machine is
unable to make copies.
Make sure that all doors and
covers are closed and that all
options are installed correctly.
Install the imaging Unit
The imaging unit is not installed correctly.
Reinstall the imaging unit or
parts, or contact your technical representative.
Replenish paper.
The indicated tray has
run out of paper.
Load paper into the indicated
tray. For details on loading paper into the paper trays, refer
to “Loading paper into the 1st
or 2nd tray” on page 2-54,
“Loading paper into the LCT”
on page 2-57, and “Loading
paper into the bypass tray” on
page 2-60.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Troubleshooting
Message
Possible cause
Remedy
Please exchange toner.
The toner is about to run
out.
Prepare to replace the toner
bottle according to your maintenance agreement.
There is no Toner.
Since the toner has run
out, the copier is unable
to make copies.
Replace the toner bottle according to your maintenance
agreement.
Stapler empty. Replace Staple
Cartridge or cancel Staple mode.
The staples have run out.
Replace the staple cartridge.
For details on replacing the
staple cartridge, refer to “Replacing the staple cartridge”
on page 9-7.
Misfeed detected.
Since a paper misfeed
occurred, the machine is
unable to make copies.
Clear the paper misfeed. See
“When the message “Misfeed
detected.” appears” on
page 5-4.
Return the following number of
originals to Document Feeder.
22
After clearing a paper
misfeed, it is necessary
to reload certain pages of
the document that have
already been fed through
the ADF.
Load the indicated document
pages into the ADF.
Malfunction detected.
Please call your Technical Representative.
The machine malfunctioned and is unable to
make copies.
Inform your technical representative of the code displayed on the touch panel.
Troubleshooting
If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation
described in the message.
Chapter 5
5
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5-35
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
5
5-36
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Specifications
Chapter 6
6
Specifications
Specifications
6
6
Specifications
6.1
Specifications
Copier
Specifications
Chapter 6
Specifications
6-2
Type
Desktop/console
Document holder
Stationary (mirror scanning)
Photoconductor
OPC
Luminous source
Cold cathode tube
Copying system
Digital laser copying
Developing system
HMT developing method (HMT-OR)
Fusing system
Heat-roller-fixing system
Resolution
600 dpi × 600 dpi
Document
Types: Sheets, books (page spreads), and three-dimensional objects
Size: Maximum A3 (11 × 17)
Weight: Maximum 55-3/4 lb (ADF), 4-1/2 lb (three-dimensional objects)
Paper types
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb),
thick paper* (24-1/4 to 55-3/4 lb),
thin paper* (13-1/4 to 14-3/4 lb),
special paper, overhead projector transparencies*, postcards*, envelopes*, label sheets*
*Can only be fed through the bypass tray
Copy sizes
1st and 2nd tray:
A3 w, B4 w to B5 w, 8-1/2 × 13 w, 11 × 17 w to 5-1/2
× 8-1/2 w/v, Legal w, Letter w/v
Bypass tray:
A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B6 w, 8-1/2 × 13 w, 11 × 17 w to 51/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, Legal w, Letter w/v, Executive w/v
Width: 3-1/2 to 11-3/4; Length: 5-1/2 to 17
Paper tray capacity
1st tray:
Plain paper: 500 sheets
2nd tray:
Plain paper: 500 sheets
Bypass tray:
Plain paper: 150 sheets; Thick paper: 50 sheets; Overhead projector transparencies/postcards/label sheets:
50 sheets; Envelopes: 10; Thin paper: 150 sheets
Copy output tray capacity
Plain paper: 500 sheets; Thick paper overhead projector
transparencies: 20 sheets
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Specifications
6
Less than 24 seconds after the machine is turned on with
the main power switch (less than 26 seconds if the fax kit
or scanner kit is installed)
Less than 14 seconds after the [Power] (auxiliary power)
key is turned on
*At room temperature (73.4°F (23°C))
Image loss
Leading edge: 1/6; Trailing edge: 1/6; Rear edge: 1/6;
Front edge: 1/6
First copy
VarioLink 2221/2821:
5.3 seconds or less (with Letter v paper fed from the 1st
tray)
VarioLink 3621:
4.8 seconds or less (with Letter v paper fed from the 1st
tray)
Copy speed
VarioLink 2221:
22 ppm (with Letter v)
VarioLink 2821:
28 ppm (with Letter v)
VarioLink 3621:
36 ppm (with Letter v)
Magnification ratios
Full size (“×1.0”): ×1.000
Enlarge: ×1.214, ×1.294, ×1.545, ×2.000
Reduce: ×0.785, ×0.733 (can be changed to ×0.772),
×0.647, ×0.500,
Minimal (×0.930)*
Zoom: ×0.250 to ×4.000 (in 0.001 increments)
Stored zoom ratios: 3
*“Minimal” zoom ratio (between ×0.900 and ×0.999)
Multiple copies
1 to 999 sheets
Density control
Manual density adjustment (9 levels)
Automatic density adjustment (5 levels)
Power requirements
AC 120 V, 11.5 A +10% or less, 60 Hz
Power consumption
1,380 W ±10% or less
Energy efficiency*1
VarioLink 2221: 20 wh/h, VarioLink 2821: 27 wh/h, VarioLink 3621: 31 wh/h
Dimensions
26-3/4 (W) × 28 (D) × 28-1/4 (H)
Space requirements*2
39-1/2 (W) × 28 (D)
Memory
Standard memory: 192 MB; For files: 32 MB
Weight
Approx. 163 lb
Specifications
Warm-up time
Chapter 6
Specifications
*1 Energy efficiency when the Low Power mode is set to 1 minute and the
Sleep mode is set to 1 minute.
*2
The indicated spaced requirements represent the space required to fully
extend the bypass tray.
In order to incorporate improvements, these product specifications are subject to change without notice.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
6-3
Specifications
6
Automatic Duplex Unit
Specifications
Paper types
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb)
Paper sizes
11 × 17 w, Legal w, Letter w/v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 10 W
Dimensions
3-1/2 (W) × 16-1/2 (D) × 14 (H)
Weight
Approx. 4-3/4 lb
Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF-620
Specifications
Chapter 6
Specifications
6-4
Document feed methods
Standard methods: Single-sided and double-sided
documents
“Mixed Original” function: Combination of single-sided
and double-sided documents
Document types
Single-sided: Plain Paper (9-1/4 to 34 lb)
Double-sided or mixed: Plain Paper (13-1/4 to 34 lb)
Document sizes
Single-sided/double-sided documents: 11 × 17 w,
Legal w, Letter w/v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
Mixed document sizes: Refer to Table 1.
Capacity of document feeder
Single-sided/double-sided documents:
Maximum 80 sheets (21-1/4 lb)
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 48 W
Dimensions
23 (W) × 22 (D) × 5-3/4 (H)
Weight
Approx. 20-3/4 lb
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Specifications
6
Table 1: Possible combinations for mixed document sizes
Maximum Document
Width →
↓ Document Size
11 × 17
w
Letter v
Legal w
Letter w
5-1/2 ×
8-1/2 v
5-1/2 ×
8-1/2 w
11 × 17 w
o
o
—
—
—
—
Letter v
o
o
—
—
—
—
Legal w
o
o
o
o
o
—
Letter w
o
o
o
o
o
—
5-1/2 × 8-1/2 v
—
—
o
o
o
—
5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
—
—
—
—
—
o
o: Possible
—: Not possible
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-108
Specifications
Paper sizes
11 × 17 w, Legal w, Letter w/v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
Paper tray capacity
3rd tray: 500 sheets (21-1/4 lb)
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 15 W
Dimensions
22-1/2 (W) × 22-3/4 (D) × 11-3/4 (H)
Weight
Approx. 54-1/2 lb
Unit structure
1 paper tray
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 6
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb)
Specifications
Paper types
6-5
Specifications
6
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-206
Specifications
Paper types
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb)
Paper sizes
11 × 17 w, Legal w, Letter w/v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
Paper tray capacity
Upper tray (3rd tray): 500 sheets (21-1/4 lb)
Lower tray (4th tray): 500 sheets (21-1/4 lb)
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 15 W
Dimensions
22-1/2 (W) × 22-3/4 (D) × 11-3/4 (H)
Weight
Approx. 57-1/4 lb
Unit structure
2 paper trays
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-407
Paper types
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb)
Paper sizes
Letter v
Paper tray capacity
2,500 sheets (21-1/4 lb)
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 45 W
Dimensions
22-1/2 (W) × 22-3/4 (D) × 11-3/4 (H)
Weight
Approx. 57-1/4 lb
Specifications
Chapter 6
Specifications
6-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Specifications
6
Finisher FS-530
Output tray 1, output tray 2
Feed settings
“Non-Sort”, “Sort”, “Group”, Staple settings, and
Punch settings
Paper types
Output tray 1:
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb)
Thick paper (24-1/4 to 55-3/4 lb), overhead projector
transparencies, postcards, envelopes, label sheets
Punch settings: Plain paper (16 to 24 lb)
Output tray 2:
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb)
Staple settings: Plain paper (15 to 24 lb)
Punch settings: Plain paper (16 to 24 lb)
Paper sizes
11 × 17, 11 × 14, Legal w, Letter w/v,
5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v
Paper capacity
Output tray 1:
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb): 200 sheets
Thick paper (24-1/4 to 55-3/4 lb), overhead projector
transparencies, postcards, envelopes, or label sheets:
20 sheets
Output tray 2:
Plain paper (21-1/4 lb): 1,000 single-sided sheets, 500
double-sided sheets
Amount of shift
1-1/4
Staple settings
Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): 11 × 17, 11 × 14, Legal w, Letter w/v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v (2 to 50 pages)
Punch settings
Paper sizes: 11 × 17, Letter w/v
Number of punched holes: 2, 3
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 66 W
Dimensions
12-1/2 (W) × 22 (D) × 22-1/2 (H)
When the tray is pulled out: 17-1/4 (W)
Weight
Approx. 47-1/4 lb (including the horizontal transport
unit)
Consumables
Staples MS-5D (5,000 staples for stapling 50 sheets) ×
2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
6-7
Specifications
Output trays
Chapter 6
Specifications
Specifications
6
Punch Unit PU-501
Specifications
Punched holes
2 holes or 3 holes
Paper types
Plain paper (16 to 24 lb)
Paper sizes
11 × 17, Letter w/v
Power requirements
Supplied from finisher
Dimensions
4-1/2 (W) × 18-1/4 (D) × 5-1/4 (H)
Weight
Approx. 4-1/4 lb
Saddle Stitcher SD-507
Chapter 6
Specifications
Number of bins
1 bin
Paper types
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb)
Paper sizes
11 × 17, Letter w
Paper capacity
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb): Maximum 200 sheets or 20
sets
Staple settings
Number of bound pages: 2 to 15 sheets
Dimensions
17-1/2 (W) × 8 (D) × 18-3/4 (H)
When the tray is pulled out: 22-3/4 (W) × 11 (D)
Weight
20-1/2 lb
Consumables
MS-2C cartridge (for 2,000) × 1
Power requirements
Supplied from finisher
Specifications
Output Tray OT-602
Specifications
6-8
Number of bins
1 bin
Paper capacity
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb): Maximum 200 sheets
Postcards, envelopes, overhead projector transparencies, or label sheets: Maximum 20 sheets
Dimensions
11 (W) × 14-1/2 (D) × 2-1/4 (H)
Weight
Approx. 1-1/2 lb
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Specifications
6
Mailbin Kit MT-502
Specifications
Number of bins
4 bins
Paper types
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb)
Paper sizes
Letter v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
Paper capacity
Maximum 125 sheets (21-1/4 lb) per bin
Dimensions
24-1/2 (W) × 19-3/4 (D) × 15-1/4 (H)
Weight
Approx. 17-1/2 lb (unit weight); Approx. 26-1/2 lb or
less (gross weight)
Power requirements
Supplied from finisher
Job Separator JS-502
1 bin
Paper types
Plain paper (15 to 24 lb), thick paper (24-1/4 to 56 lb),
overhead projector transparencies, postcards, envelopes, label sheets, thin paper (13-1/4 to 14-3/4 lb)
Paper sizes
11 × 17, 11 × 14, Legal w, Letter w/v,
5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v
Paper capacity
100 sheets
Dimensions
17-3/4 (W) × 17-1/2 (D) × 3 (H)
Weight
Approx. 3-3/4 lb
Specifications
Number of bins
Chapter 6
Specifications
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
6-9
Specifications
Specifications
Chapter 6
6
6-10
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original
documents
Chapter 7
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original documents
Chapter 7
7
7
Copy paper/original documents
7.1
Copy paper
Use paper that meets the following specifications.
Possible paper sizes
Non-standard-sized paper:
Paper source
Paper width
Paper length
Bypass tray
3-1/2 to 11-3/4
5-1/2 to 17
1st tray
—
—
—
—
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
LCT
Double-sided copies
Standard-sized paper:
Paper source
Paper size
Bypass tray
A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B6 w, 8-1/2 × 13 w, 11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/
2 w/v, Legal w, Letter w/v, Executive w/v
1st tray
A3 w, B4 w to B5 w, 8-1/2 × 13 w, 11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/
v, Legal w, Letter w/v
2nd tray
3rd tray
11 × 17 w, Legal w, Letter w/v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
4th tray
LCT
Letter v
Double-sided copies
11 × 17 w, Legal w, Letter w/v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
Loaded equipment
Paper sizes that can be loaded
Finisher (FS-530)
Output tray 1, 2 and optional output tray
3-1/2 × 5-1/2 to 11-3/4 × 17
“Group”/“Sort” settings: 7-1/4 × 5-1/2 to 11-3/4 × 17
Staple settings: 7-1/4 × 7-1/4 to 11-3/4 × 17
Punch settings: 8-1/2 × 7-3/16 to 11-11/16 × 17 (with the “2-Hole”
punch setting), 11 × 7-3/16 to 11-11/16 × 17 (with the “3-Hole”
punch setting)*2
Output tray (OT-602)
7-2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Copy paper/original documents
Paper sizes that can be loaded
Saddle stitcher (SD-507)
Folding/binding: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 11 × 17 w, 11 × 14 w,
Letter w, 7-1/4 × 10 to 11-3/4 × 17
Mailbin kit (MT-502)
7-1/4 × 7-1/4 to 11-3/4 × 11-3/4
Punch settings: 7-1/4 × 7-1/4 to 11-3/4 × 11-3/4 (with the “2-Hole”
punch setting), 11 × 7-1/6 to 17 × 17 (with the “3-Hole” punch setting) *2
Job separator (JS-502)
11 × 17 w, 11 × 14 w, Legal w, Letter w/v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v
Copy output tray (standard)
A3 w, B4 w to A5 w, A6 w, 8-1/2 × 13 w*1, 11 × 17 w, 11 × 14
w, Legal w, Letter w/v, Executive w/v, Invoice w/v,
non-standard sizes, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v
*1
There are four Foolscap sizes: 8-1/2 × 13 w*1, 8-1/4 × 13 w*1, 8 × 13 w*1
and 8-5/8 × 13 w*1. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For details, contact your technical representative.
*2
Can be used when optional punch unit is installed on finisher
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7-3
Copy paper/original documents
Loaded equipment
Chapter 7
7
Copy paper/original documents
Chapter 7
7
Copy paper/original documents
Paper types and paper capacities
Paper type
Plain paper
Thick paper
Thin paper
Recycled paper
Weight (lb)
15 lb
to
24 lb
24-1/4 lb
to
55-3/4 lb
13-1/4 lb
to
14-3/4 lb
15 lb
to
24 lb
Paper source
Bypass tray
150 sheets
50 sheets
150 sheets
150 sheets
1st tray
500 sheets
—
—
500 sheets
2nd tray
500 sheets
500 sheets
3rd tray
500 sheets
500 sheets
4th tray
500 sheets
500 sheets
LCT
2,500 sheets
2,500 sheets
Double-sided copies
o
—
—
o
Paper type
Overhead
projector
transparencies
Postcards
Envelopes
Label sheets
Bypass tray
50 sheets
50 sheets
10 sheets
50 sheets
1st tray
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Paper source
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
LCT
Double-sided copies
7-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Copy paper/original documents
Paper other than plain paper, such as overhead projector transparencies and
recycled paper, is called special paper. Be sure to select a special paper setting for paper trays loaded with media such as overhead projector transparencies and recycled paper in order to prevent operating errors.
Paper type
Icon
Description
OHP
Select this setting when overhead projector transparencies are loaded.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the “Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched
automatically.
Thick
Select this setting when thick paper with a weight of
24-1/4 lb to 55-3/4 lb is loaded.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the “Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched
automatically.
Thin
Select this setting when thin paper with a weight of
13-1/4 lb to 14-3/4 lb is loaded.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the “Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched
automatically.
Envelope
Select this setting when envelopes are loaded.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the “Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched
automatically.
Single Sided Only
Select this setting when the paper that is loaded
should not be used with double-sided copying (for
example, when one side has already been printed
on).
A paper tray with this setting is given priority when
the “Auto Paper Select” setting is specified.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected during double-sided copying.
Recycled
Select this setting when the paper that is loaded
should not be given priority, for example, when recycled paper is loaded.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the “Auto Paper Select” setting is specified.
Special Paper
Select this setting when the paper that is loaded is
from a particular manufacturer or special paper that
is not usually used.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the “Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched
automatically.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7-5
Copy paper/original documents
Special paper
Chapter 7
7
Copy paper/original documents
Chapter 7
7
!
Detail
The available special paper settings differ for each paper tray.
Copy paper/original documents
The settings for overhead projector transparencies, thick paper, thin paper and envelopes can be specified only for the bypass tray. For details
on specifying the settings for overhead projector transparencies, thick
paper, thin paper and envelopes for the bypass tray, refer to “To specify
a setting for special paper (Change Setting)” on page 7-15.
For details on specifying the settings for paper only for single-sided copying, for recycled paper and for special paper, refer to “Special Paper
Setting” on page 11-12.
Precautions for paper
The following types of paper should not be used, otherwise decreased print
quality, paper misfeeds or damage to the machine may occur.
- Overhead projector transparencies that have already been fed through
the machine (even if the transparency is still blank)
- Paper that has been printed on by a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet
printer
- Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin
- Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper
- Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time
- Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes
- Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven
surface
- Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or
pressure-sensitive paper
- Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing
- Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular)
- Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips
- Paper with labels attached
- Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached
Paper storage
Observe the following precautions when storing the paper.
- Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity.
- If the paper becomes damp, paper misfeeds may occur. Paper that has
not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a plastic bag and
stored in a cool, dark location with little humidity.
- Store the paper laying flat, not standing on its edge. Curled paper may
cause paper misfeeds.
- Keep paper out of the reach of children.
7-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Automatic paper-tray-switching feature
If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a
different paper tray is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions,
the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can continue. If the
optional LCT is installed, a maximum of 3,650 copies (with Letter v paper)
can be made continuously.
Operating Conditions
- The paper is the same size.
- The paper is positioned in the same orientation.
- The paper is the same type.
Order for selecting the paper trays
As a factory default, when a different paper tray is automatically selected, the
next paper tray in the following list is chosen.
1st tray → 2nd tray → 3rd tray/LCT → 4th tray → Bypass tray
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7-7
Chapter 7
7
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original documents
7.2
Specifying paper settings for the bypass tray
This section describes the procedures for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in the bypass tray.
!
Copy paper/original documents
Chapter 7
7
Detail
For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to “Loading
paper into the bypass tray” on page 2-60.
To specify the paper size (Change Setting)
Standard paper sizes can be specified for the paper loaded into the bypass
tray.
This is useful, for example, when the size of the paper that is loaded cannot
be automatically detected (such as with paper in inch sizes).
1
Load the paper into the bypass tray.
2
In the Basics screen,
touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
7-8
3
Select the button for the
bypass tray.
4
Touch [Change Setting].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
5
7
Chapter 7
Copy paper/original documents
Select the size of paper
loaded into the bypass
tray.
How can the size of
paper loaded into the
bypass tray be selected?
% For details, refer to
“To specify a setting
for special paper
(Change Setting)” on
page 7-15.
6
Copy paper/original documents
?
Touch [Enter].
The Paper screen appears again.
The paper size for the bypass tray is set.
2
Reminder
If paper other than the specified paper size is loaded, a paper misfeed
may occur since the paper size is not automatically detected.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7-9
Copy paper/original documents
Chapter 7
7
To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)
Non-standard-sized paper can be loaded only into the bypass tray.
Copy paper/original documents
If non-standard-sized paper is loaded, it will be necessary to specify the paper size.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
7-10
2
Select the button for the
bypass tray.
3
Touch [Change Setting].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 7
4
7
Touch [Custom Size].
The Custom Size screen
appears.
How can the size of paper loaded into the bypass tray be selected?
% For details, refer to “To specify a setting for special paper (Change
Setting)” on page 7-15.
?
5
Type in the length (X)
and width (Y) of the paper.
–
Make sure that [X] is
selected, and then
use the keypad to
type in the length of
side X (between 5.50
and 17.00).
– Touch [Y] to select it,
and then use the
keypad to type in the
length of side Y (between 3.56 and 11.68).
– If “Inch (Fraction)” was selected as the measurement units, touch
[X] or [Y] to position the cursor in the input box, and then touch
or
to specify the length.
– A value outside the allowable range cannot be entered.
– To change the entered value, press the [C] (clear) key, and then enter the correct value.
Can paper sizes be stored?
% Two specified non-standard paper sizes can be stored. For details,
refer to “To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)”
on page 7-12.
?
% To recall a stored paper size, touch [1] or [2].
6
Touch [Enter].
The Paper screen appears again.
A non-standard paper size is specified.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7-11
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original documents
Chapter 7
7
To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)
Two non-standard paper sizes for the bypass tray can be stored.
Copy paper/original documents
Storing paper sizes that are used often allows the paper size to be quickly
selected, without having to re-enter the setting.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
7-12
2
Select the button for the
bypass tray.
3
Touch [Change Setting].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 7
4
7
Touch [Custom Size].
The Custom Size screen
appears.
How can the size of paper loaded into the bypass tray be selected?
% For details, refer to “To specify a setting for special paper (Change
Setting)” on page 7-15.
?
5
Touch [Size Registration].
The Size Registration
screen appears.
6
Type in the length (X)
and width (Y) of the paper.
–
–
–
–
Make sure that [X] is
selected, and then
use the keypad to
type in the length of
side X (between 5.50
and 17.00).
Touch [Y] to select it,
and then use the
keypad to type in the
length of side Y (between 3.56 and 11.68).
If “Inch (Fraction)” was selected as the measurement units, touch
[X] or [Y] to position the cursor in the input box, and then touch
or
to specify the length.
A value outside the allowable range cannot be entered.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7-13
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original documents
Chapter 7
7
–
7
Touch [1] or [2] to specify where the size is to be stored.
–
Copy paper/original documents
To change the entered value, press the [C] (clear) key, and then enter the correct value.
If a button is pressed where no size is stored, the stored paper size
appears on the button to indicate that a size has been stored.
No program registered
Program registered
How is the stored paper size recalled?
% Touch [1] or [2] in the Custom Size screen to recall the stored paper
size.
?
8
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
The Paper screen appears again.
The non-standard paper size is stored.
7-14
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
To specify a setting for special paper (Change Setting)
If a setting for special paper, such as overhead projector transparencies and
other special paper, is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the “Auto Paper Select” setting or the automatic paper-trayswitching feature. However, a paper tray set to “Single Sided Only” is given
priority when the “Auto Paper Select” setting is specified.
The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for overhead
projector transparencies, thick paper, thin paper or envelopes loaded into
the bypass tray.
1
In the Basics screen,
touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2
Select the button for the
bypass tray.
3
Touch [Change Setting].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7-15
Chapter 7
7
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original documents
Chapter 7
7
4
Select the desired special paper type.
What types of paper
can be loaded into
each paper tray?
% There are limits on
the types of paper
that can be loaded in
a paper tray. For details on the types of
paper that can loaded, refer to “Specifications” on page 6-2 and “Paper types and paper capacities” on page 7-4.
Copy paper/original documents
?
5
Touch [Enter].
The Paper screen appears again.
The paper type for the bypass tray is set.
2
Reminder
If overhead projector transparencies or thick paper is loaded into the bypass tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type, otherwise a
paper misfeed may occur.
!
Detail
For details on the special paper, refer to “Special paper” on page 7-5.
For details on specifying the settings for paper only for single-sided copying, for recycled paper and for special paper, refer to “Special Paper
Setting” on page 11-12.
The settings for overhead projector transparencies, thick paper, thin paper and envelopes can also be specified for the bypass tray, even if a setting for paper only for single-sided copying, for recycled paper and for
special paper is specified.
7-16
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Copy paper/original documents
When making copies, load the document into the ADF or position it on the
original glass.
To copy documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on
the original glass.
Documents that can be loaded Into the ADF
There are two methods for using the ADF.
- Normal method
- For documents of mixed sizes
There are limits on the types of documents that can be loaded with each
method.
Normal method
Single-sided documents
Double-sided documents
Document paper type/
Weight
Plain paper: 9-1/4 lb to 34 lb
Plain paper: 13-1/4 lb to 34 lb
Document size
11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
Paper capacity
80 sheets (21-1/4 lb paper)
For documents of mixed sizes
Single-sided documents
Double-sided documents
Document paper type/
Weight
Plain paper: 13-1/4 lb to 34 lb
Document size
Refer to “Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting)” on page 3-16.
Paper capacity
80 sheets (21-1/4 lb paper)
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7-17
Chapter 7
Original documents
Copy paper/original documents
7.3
7
Copy paper/original documents
Chapter 7
7
Precautions for loading documents Into the ADF
Copy paper/original documents
The following types of documents should not be loaded into the ADF, otherwise paper misfeeds or damage to the document may occur.
- Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn documents
- Highly translucent or transparent documents, such as overhead transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper
- Coated documents such as carbon-backed paper
- Documents printed on paper thicker than 34-1/4 lb
- Documents that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips
- Documents that are bound in a book or booklet
- Documents that are bound together with glue
- Document pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts
- Label sheets
- Offset printing masters
- Documents with binder holes
- Documents that have just been printed with this machine
2
Reminder
Before loading folded documents, such as those folded in half or in a zigzag, into the ADF, be sure to flatten the pages.
7-18
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Copy paper/original documents
To copy documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on
the original glass.
Original glass documents
Document type
Sheets, books (page spreads), three-dimensional objects
Document size
11 × 17 w or less
Maximum weight
4-1/2 lb
Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass
Observe the following precautions when placing the document on the original glass.
- The size of documents printed on paper in metric sizes (such as A3, B4
and A4) cannot be automatically detected. The setting must be specified
by the technical representative. For details, contact the technical representative.
- If a document of non-standard paper size is loaded, the “Auto Paper Select” and “Auto Zoom” settings cannot be used since the document size
cannot be detected automatically. If a document of non-standard paper
size is loaded, select the size of the paper to be copied.
- If highly translucent or transparent documents, such as overhead transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper, are loaded, the document size
cannot be detected automatically. Place a blank sheet of paper of the
same size over the document.
- Do not place objects exceeding 4-1/2 lb on the original glass, otherwise
the original glass may be damaged.
- If a book is placed on the original glass, do not press it down extremely
hard, otherwise the original glass may be damaged.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7-19
Copy paper/original documents
Documents that can be placed on the original glass
Chapter 7
7
Copy paper/original documents
Copy paper/original documents
Chapter 7
7
7-20
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8
Application functions
Application functions
Chapter 8
Application functions
8
Application functions
8.1
Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function)
Specify the paper to be used for the cover pages and add front and back
cover pages to the copies.
In addition, the first and last pages of the document can be copied onto the
cover pages.
Cover page
Setting
Description
Front Cover
With Image
The first page of the document is copied onto
the front cover page.
Blank
The front cover page is added at the beginning of the copy.
None
A back cover page is not added.
With Image
The last page of the document is copied onto
the back cover page.
Blank
The back cover page is added at the end of
the copy.
Single-sided
document
With the “With Image”
setting
34
12
1
234
34
12
1
34
12
234
Double-sided
document
7
7
5
3
1
8
5
6
6
4
3
1
2
2
3
1
5
7
5
7
8
8
4
3
1
34
12
7
6
5
With the “Blank”
setting
3
4
Back Cover
1
2
Application functions
Chapter 8
8
7
5
3
1
Cover page
8-2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
8
To copy using the “Cover Mode” function
0 The “Cover Mode” function can be used only if the ADF is installed.
–
–
2
Load the paper for the cover pages and the paper for the main body of
the document into separate paper trays.
–
3
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
If the document contains more than 80 pages, refer to “Scanning a
document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)” on
page 3-12.
Use paper with the same size for the cover pages and for the main
body of the document, and load them in the same orientation.
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Cover
Mode].
–
For details on loading paper when using
thick paper for the
cover pages, refer to
“Paper types and paper capacities” on
page 7-4 and “Loading paper into the bypass tray” on
page 2-60.
The Cover Mode screen appears.
4
Select the desired cover
page settings.
–
To cancel the “Cover
Mode” function,
touch [OFF].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-3
Chapter 8
Load the document into the ADF.
Application functions
1
Application functions
8
5
Touch the button under “Cover Paper”.
Application functions
Chapter 8
The Cover Paper screen appears.
6
Select the paper tray
loaded with the paper for
the cover pages.
7
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
8
Specify any other desired copy settings.
9
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
10
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
8-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
8.2
8
Inserting cover pages (“Insert Sheet” function)
Select either “With Image” or “Blank” to specify whether or not a page of the
document is copied onto the insertion sheet.
34
12
1
3
2
34
12
1
3
6
6
2
3
4
4
7
5
3
1
5
7
5
1
2
3
1
3
1
2
2
7
5
7
8
8
6
4
3
1
7
5
4
3
12
4
2
4
3
12
4
Double-sided
document
7
5
With the “Blank”
setting
Application functions
With the “With Image”
setting
8
Single-sided
document
3
1
Insertion sheet
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 8
Paper, such as colored paper, can be inserted into the copy as an insertion
sheet.
8-5
Application functions
8
To copy using the “Insert Sheet” function
0 The “Insert Sheet” function can be used only if the ADF is installed.
Insert a separator at the desired locations of the insertion sheets, and
then load the document into the ADF.
Single-sided document
Application functions
12
34
6
78
56
8
7
5
3
2
4
12
34
Double-sided document
78
56
1
7
5
2
Chapter 8
1
3
1
Separator
–
–
–
2
Load the paper for the insertion sheets and the paper for the main body
of the document into separate paper trays.
–
3
Insert paper separators with a different width than the document at
the desired locations for the insertion sheets.
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting)” on page 3-16.
If the document contains more than 80 pages, refer to “Scanning a
document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)” on
page 3-12.
Use paper with the same size for the insertion sheets and for the
main body of the document, and load them in the same orientation.
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Insert
Sheet].
–
For details on loading paper when using
thick paper for the insertion sheets, refer
to “Paper types and
paper capacities” on
page 7-4 and “Loading paper into the bypass tray” on
page 2-60.
The Insert Sheet screen appears.
8-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
–
–
–
5
If “With Image” is selected, the page after
the inserted separator is copied onto the
insertion sheet. With
double-sided copying, the two pages
after the separator
are copied onto the
two sides of the insertion sheet.
If “Blank” is selected, the insertion sheet is added at the location
where the separator was inserted.
To cancel the “Insert Sheet” function, touch [OFF].
Touch the button under “Insert Paper”.
The Cover Paper screen appears.
6
Select the paper tray
loaded with the paper for
the insertion sheets.
7
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
8
Specify any other desired copy settings.
9
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
10
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-7
Chapter 8
Touch either [With Image] or [Blank].
Application functions
4
8
Application functions
8
8.3
Inserting paper between overhead projector transparencies (“OHP Interleave” function)
Chapter 8
In order to prevent copies printed onto overhead projector transparencies
from sticking together as a result of the heat that is produced during copying,
paper (interleaves) can be inserted between the transparencies.
Application functions
Select either “With Image” or “Blank” to specify whether or not the copy is
printed onto the interleaves.
EFGH
EFGH
EFGH
With the “With Image”
setting
With the “Blank”
setting
EFGH
EFE
GF
HG H
EFE
GF
HG H
EFGH
EFGH
EFGH
EFGH
To copy using the “OHP Interleave” function
0 No Finishing setting can be used.
0 The number of copies is set to “1” and cannot be changed.
1
Position the document to be copied.
–
2
Load the overhead projector transparencies into the bypass tray, and
load the interleaf paper into the desired paper tray.
–
–
8-8
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
For details on loading overhead projector transparencies, refer to
“Paper types and paper capacities” on page 7-4, “Loading paper
into the bypass tray” on page 2-60, and “To specify a setting for
special paper (Change Setting)” on page 7-15.
Use interleaf paper with the same size as the overhead projector
transparencies, and load them in the same orientation as the transparencies.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
Touch [Application], and
then touch [OHP Interleave].
4
Chapter 8
The OHP Interleave
screen appears.
Touch either [With Image] or [Blank].
–
–
–
If “With Image” is selected, the interleaves are inserted,
alternating with overhead projector transparencies, and the
same document
page is printed on a
transparency and an
interleaf.
If “Blank” is selected, blank interleaves are inserted between the
overhead projector transparencies.
To cancel the “OHP Interleave” function, touch [OFF].
5
Touch the button under “Interleaving Paper”.
6
Select the paper tray
loaded with the interleaf
paper.
7
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-9
Application functions
3
8
Application functions
8
8
Specify any other desired copy settings.
9
Press the [Start] key.
Application functions
Chapter 8
Copying begins.
8-10
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
Adding filing margins to copies (“Page Margin” function)
Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing
binders. When making double-sided copies while using the “Page Margin”
function, the orientation of the copied image can be adjusted for the position
of the filing margin. In addition, the image orientation can be adjusted without
creating a filing margin.
Chapter 8
8.4
8
23
4
23 ABCD
1 ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD 4
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD 23
4
ABCD
1 ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD 4
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD 23
1
Application functions
Left filing margin
3
1
ABCD
2 ABCD
ABCD
ABC 3
BC
A
ABC
Top filing margin
1
4
23 ABCD
1 ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD 3 4
ABCD 2
1
3
1 2 ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
3
To copy using the “Page Margin” function
1
Position the document to be copied.
–
2
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Page Margin].
The Page Margin screen
appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-11
Application functions
8
3
Select the position of the
filing margin.
Chapter 8
–
Application functions
–
4
Touch the button for
a left filing margin or
for a top filing margin.
To cancel the “Page
Margin” function,
touch [OFF].
Touch
?
%
and
to specify the width of the filing margin.
Can only the orientation of the image be adjusted?
Set the width of the filing margin to 0 to adjust only the orientation
of the image during double-sided copying.
The margin position can be changed without changing the margin
width.
5
Touch [Enter].
6
Specify any other desired copy settings.
7
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
8
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
2
Note
The filing margin position indicates the position on each document page.
8-12
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
Erasing unwanted areas of copies (“Edge/Frame
Erase” function)
A
Application functions
Copies can be produced by erasing unwanted areas around the document,
such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of
punched holes.
A
A : 3/16 to 13/16
To copy using the “Edge/Frame Erase” function
1
Position the document to be copied.
–
2
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Edge/Frame
Erase].
The Edge/Frame Erase
screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 8
8.5
8
8-13
Application functions
8
3
Specify the area to be
erased.
Chapter 8
–
Application functions
–
Touch the button for
erasing the left side,
the top, or a surrounding frame.
To cancel the “Edge/
Frame Erase” function, touch [OFF].
4
Touch
erased.
5
Touch [Enter].
6
Specify any other desired copy settings.
7
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
8
Press the [Start] key.
and
to specify the width of the area to be
Copying begins.
2
Note
If the frame is selected, the same width is erased on all four sides of the
document.
The area to be erased indicates the area on each document page.
8-14
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
8.6
8
Tiling copy images (“Image Repeat” function)
Application functions
Chapter 8
Multiple copies of the specified scanning area can be printed on a single
sheet of paper.
To copy using the “Image Repeat” function
1
Position the document to be copied.
–
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
2
Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray.
3
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Book Copy/
Repeat].
The Book Copy/Repeat
screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-15
Application functions
8
4
Touch [Image Repeat].
To cancel a Book
Copy/Repeat function, touch [OFF].
Application functions
Chapter 8
–
5
Touch [Auto Detect] or
[Oversized Paper], depending on the area of
the document to be
scanned.
–
–
–
6
Select the size of the
area to be scanned.
–
8-16
If “Auto Detect” is
selected, the area of
a standard document size is
scanned. Continue
with step 8.
If “Oversized Paper”
is selected, the size can be selected or a non-standard size can be
entered. The Oversized Paper screen appears.
To cancel the “Image Repeat” function, touch [OFF].
Touch [Custom Size]
to display the Custom Size screen.
Touch [X] or [Y], use
the keypad to specify
the size, and then
touch [Enter].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
–
–
–
If “Inch (Fraction)”
<Custom Size screen>
was selected as the
measurement units,
touch [X] or [Y] to position the cursor in
the input box, and
then touch
or
to specify the
length.
A value outside the
allowable range cannot be entered.
To change the entered value, press
the [C] (clear) key, and then enter the correct value.
If the “Image Repeat” function is registered with a program, both
standard sizes and non-standard sizes can be registered. For details on registering programs, refer to “Registering copy programs
(Mode Memory)” on page 4-8.
7
Touch [Enter].
8
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next two screens that appear.
9
In the Basics screen,
touch [Paper], and then
select the paper tray
loaded with the paper.
10
Specify any other desired copy settings.
11
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
12
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-17
Chapter 8
–
8
Application functions
Application functions
Application functions
8
8.7
Producing separate copies of each page in a page
spread (“Book Copy” function)
Chapter 8
A page spread, such as in an open book or catalog, can be copied with the
left and right pages on separate pages or both on the same page.
Application functions
In addition, settings can be specified for the “Page Order” and “Book Erase”
functions. The following Book Copy settings are available.
Setting
Description
Separation
Separate copies of each page in the page spread is printed in
the document page order. The document is scanned to fit the
size of paper that will be used.
Book Spread
Both pages of the page spread are printed on the same page.
With the “Separation”
setting
With the “Book Spread” setting
8-18
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
8
To copy using the “Book Copy” function
0 Place the document on the original glass.
–
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
2
Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray.
3
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Book Copy/
Repeat].
The Book Copy/Repeat
screen appears.
4
Touch [Book Copy].
–
To cancel a Book
Copy/Repeat function, touch [OFF].
The Book Copy screen
appears.
5
Touch [Left Bind] or
[Right Bind], according
to the binding position of
the document.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 8
Place the book on the original glass.
Application functions
1
8-19
Application functions
8
6
Touch [Separation] or
[Book Spread].
Application functions
Chapter 8
–
–
–
–
–
<Page Order screen>
When separating
page spreads and
making double-sided
copies, touch [Page
Order] to display the
Page Order screen.
Touch [Book Order]
or [Standard], and
then touch [Enter].
To cancel the Page
Order setting, touch
[OFF].
If “Page Order” is set to “Book Order”, the left and right pages of
the spread are copied onto two separate sheets of paper in the
same page order as the document.
If “Page Order” is set to “Standard”, the left and right pages of the
spread are copied onto the front and back sides of a single sheet
of paper.
If desired, touch
[Book Erase] to display the Book Erase
screen. Touch the
buttons indicated by
“Frame”, specify the
width of the erased
area as
and
, and then
touch [Enter].
<Book Erase screen>
What do the Book Erase settings do?
% If a Book Erase setting is selected, the dark shadows around the
document or along the center of the document can be erased.
?
7
8-20
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
In the Basics screen,
touch [Paper], and then
select the paper tray
loaded with the paper.
9
Specify any other desired copy settings.
10
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
11
Press the [Start] key.
Application functions
Chapter 8
8
8
Copying begins.
2
Note
For details on scanning a document with “Page Order” set to “Book Order”, refer to “Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass”
on page 3-14.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-21
Application functions
8
8.8
Creating booklet copies (“Booklet” function)
Application functions
12
3
78
4
68 1
7
REPORT
3
5
12
6 3
78
3
2
Chapter 8
Double-sided copies of the document pages are arranged so that the copies
can be read like a bound book when it is folded in half. Stapling is available
only if optional finisher is installed.
REPORT
8
1
!
Detail
Generally, a multiple of 4 document pages is required with a single-sided
document, and a multiple of 2 document pages is required with a doublesided document. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end.
For details on stapling, refer to “Binding copies at the center” on
page 3-59.
If the document contains more than 80 pages, refer to “Scanning a document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)” on page 3-12.
The width of the binding margin is automatically specified.
8-22
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
8
To copy using the “Booklet” function
Position the document to be copied.
–
2
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Book Copy/
Repeat].
3
Application functions
The Book Copy/Repeat
screen appears.
Touch [Booklet].
–
To cancel the “Booklet” function, touch
[Booklet] again to
deselect it.
4
Specify any other desired copy settings.
5
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
6
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 8
1
8-23
Application functions
8
8.9
Printing additional information on copies (Image Settings functions)
Chapter 8
A stamp, such as “CONFIDENTIAL” can be added to the center of background copies, or a distribution number can be added when multiple copies
are made.
The following Image Settings functions are available.
Application functions
Setting
Description
Set Numbering
A three-digit distribution number can be printed on each copy.
Stamp
The selected preset text (CONFIDENTIAL, TOP SECRET,
COPY, DRAFT, DO NOT COPY, FINAL, or PROOF) can be printed.
3
12
REPORT
00
REPORT
3
12
1
3
12
3
12
To print the distribution number (“Set Numbering” function)
0 The distribution number is normally printed as a three-digit number. If
“Starting Number” is set to “1”, “001” is printed.
1
Position the document to be copied.
–
8-24
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
2
8
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Image Settings].
Application functions
3
Chapter 8
The Image Settings
screen appears.
Touch [Set Numbering].
–
To cancel the Image
Settings functions,
touch [OFF].
– If the optional hard
disk drive is installed,
the “Image Overlay”
function can be
used. For details, refer to “Printing copies overlapping a
different image (“Image Overlay” function)” on page 8-28.
The Set Numbering screen appears.
4
Using the keypad, type
in the starting number
under “Starting
Number”.
–
–
–
The starting number
can be set between 0
and 999.
Press the [C] (clear)
key to reset “Starting
Number” to “1”.
To cancel the “Set
Numbering” function, touch [OFF].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-25
Application functions
8
5
Select the desired settings under “Pages” and “Text Density”.
Chapter 8
–
Application functions
–
If “Pages” is set to “First page only”, the distribution number is only
printed on the first page of the copy. If “All Pages” is selected, the
distribution number is printed on all pages.
Select a setting under “Text Density” to specify the density of the
printed distribution number.
6
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
7
Specify any other desired copy settings.
8
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
9
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
To print preset text at the center of the copy image (“Stamp” function)
1
Position the document to be copied.
–
2
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Image Settings].
The Image Settings
screen appears.
8-26
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
3
8
Touch [Stamp].
To cancel the Image
Settings functions,
touch [OFF].
The Stamp screen appears.
Application functions
4
Chapter 8
–
Select the desired stamp
text and the desired setting under “Pages”.
–
–
If “Pages” is set to
“First page only”, the
stamp is only printed
on the first page of
the copy. If “All Pages” is selected, the
stamp is printed on
all pages.
To cancel the
“Stamp” function, touch [OFF].
5
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
6
Specify any other desired copy settings.
7
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
8
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-27
Application functions
8
8.10
Printing copies overlapping a different image (“Image
Overlay” function)
Chapter 8
Images previously stored on the hard disk can be printed overlapping copies.
To store an overlay image (Store Overlay)
0 The “Store Overlay” function is available only if optional hard disk is installed.
Application functions
1
Position the overlay document to be stored on the hard disk.
–
2
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
Press the [Utility/Counter] key, and then touch
[User Setting].
The User Setting screen
appears.
3
Touch [Store Overlay].
The Store Overlay
screen appears.
8-28
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
–
If a button is pressed
where no image is
stored, the size of the
stored image appears on the button
to indicate that an
image has been
stored.
No program registered
–
–
5
Chapter 8
Touch [Set], and then
touch the button ([1]
through [5]) for the
number where the image
is to be stored.
Application functions
4
8
Program registered
To store the image with a number where an image is already stored,
delete the image, touch [Set], and then touch the button for the
number.
To delete the image, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for
the number stored with the image.
Select the size of the
area to be scanned.
–
–
To cancel changes to
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
Touch [Auto Detect]
to automatically detect the size of the
area to be scanned in
the document image.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-29
Application functions
8
Chapter 8
–
Application functions
–
–
–
Touch [Custom Size]
to display the Custom Size screen.
Touch [X] or [Y], use
the keypad to specify
the size, and then
touch [Enter].
If “Inch (Fraction)”
was selected as the
measurement units,
touch [X] or [Y] to position the cursor in
the input box, and then touch
or
to specify the
length.
A value outside the allowable range cannot be entered.
To change the entered value, press the [C] (clear) key, and then enter the correct value.
6
Touch [Enter].
7
Select the document orientation.
–
8
To cancel changes to
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
Press the [Start] key.
The document is scanned, and the overlay image is stored.
2
Note
The size of the scanned area appears on the button where the image is
stored.
8-30
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
8
To recall an overlay image
0 The “Image Overlay” function is available only if optional hard disk is installed.
Position the document to be copied.
–
2
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
Application functions
1
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Image Settings].
The Image Settings
screen appears.
3
Touch [Image Overlay].
–
To cancel the Image
Settings functions,
touch [OFF].
The Image Overlay
screen appears.
4
Touch [Recall], and then
touch the button for the
number stored with the
image.
–
To cancel the “Image
Overlay” function,
touch [OFF].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 8
Stored overlay images can be recalled and printed overlapping copies.
8-31
Application functions
8
5
Specify the printing position.
Application functions
Chapter 8
–
6
Touch the button for
positioning the overlay at the top, center
or bottom.
Select the desired setting under “Pages”.
–
–
If “Pages” is set to “First page only”, the overlay image is only printed overlapping the first page of the copy. If “All Pages” is selected,
the overlay image is printed overlapping all pages.
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
7
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next two screens that appear.
8
Specify any other desired copy settings.
9
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
10
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
2
Note
The size of the scanned area appears on buttons where an image is
stored.
8-32
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
8
To check the overlay image
0 The “Image Overlay” function is available only if optional hard disk is installed.
1
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Image Settings].
–
To check the image
from the Store Overlay screen, display
the Store Overlay
screen, and then perform the same procedure starting from
step 3. For details on
displaying the Store
Overlay screen, refer to “To store an overlay image (Store Overlay)”
on page 8-28.
The Image Settings screen appears.
2
Touch [Image Overlay].
–
To cancel the Image
Settings functions,
touch [OFF].
The Image Overlay
screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-33
Application functions
The following procedure describes how to check the image from the Image
Overlay screen of the Application screen.
Chapter 8
The stored image can be printed from the Image Overlay screen or Store
Overlay screen in order to be checked.
Application functions
8
Chapter 8
3
Touch [Check], and then
touch the button for the
number stored with the
image.
Application functions
–
4
Select a paper tray loaded with paper.
–
5
To cancel the “Image
Overlay” function,
touch [OFF].
To cancel changes to
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
Press the [Start] key.
The overlay image is printed.
2
Note
The size of the scanned area appears on buttons where an image is
stored.
8-34
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Application functions
Copying with light and dark coloring inversed (“B/W
Reverse” setting)
Application functions
A document can be copied with the light and dark coloring or the black and
white coloring (gradations) of the image inversed.
Chapter 8
8.11
8
To copy using the “B/W Reverse” setting
1
Position the document to be copied.
–
2
For details on positioning the document, refer to “Feeding the document” on page 3-8.
Touch [Application], and
then touch [B/W Reverse].
–
To cancel the “B/W
Reverse” setting,
touch [B/W Reverse]
again to deselect it.
3
Specify any other desired copy settings.
4
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
5
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
8-35
Application functions
8
8.12
Separate scan
The machine can be set to continue scanning the document.
Chapter 8
To scan documents continuously
Application functions
%
Touch [Application], and
then touch [Separate
Scan].
– To cancel the “Separate Scan” setting,
touch [Separate
Scan] again to deselect it.
!
Detail
For details on continuously scanning documents, refer to “Scanning a
document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)” on page 3-12.
8-36
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Replacing toner bottles
and staples and emptying
punch waste containers
Chapter 9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and
emptying punch waste containers
9.1
Replacing the toner bottle
When the toner is about to run out, the advanced warning message shown
below appears.
!
Detail
First, the message “Please exchange toner.” appears, and then the message “There is no Toner.” appears and the machine stops operating. The
number of pages that can be printed after the message “Please exchange toner.” appears and before the message “There is no Toner.” appears differs depending on the printing conditions, the consumables and
the part to be replaced. After the first message appears, prepare to replace the toner bottle according to your maintenance agreement.
When the toner is empty, the warning message shown below appears and
copies can no longer be made.
9-2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
2
Note
When the message appears, replace the toner bottle according to your
maintenance agreement.
!
Detail
For details on replacing the toner bottle, refer to “To replace the toner
bottle” on page 9-4.
7 CAUTION
Handling toner and toner bottles
%
Do not throw toner or the toner bottle into a fire.
%
Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns.
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your
clothes or hands.
%
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with
soap and water.
%
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then
seek professional medical attention.
2
Reminder
Be sure to replace the toner bottle only after the message “There is no
Toner.” appears.
Be sure to use toner bottles of the specified model, otherwise the machine may be damaged.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9-3
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
Chapter 9
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
To replace the toner bottle
1
Open the machine’s front door.
2
Pull the toner hopper out
toward you as far as
possible.
3
While pulling on the handle, flip up the toner bottle holder.
4
Carefully pull out the
used toner bottle.
How is the used toner bottle disposed
of?
% Do not throw away
the empty toner bottle. Instead, keep it
so that it can be collected by your technical representative.
?
9-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Hit one end of the new
toner bottle against a
hard surface, such as a
desk or table, four or five
times, and then hit the
other end four or five
times.
–
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
5
9
Chapter 9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
The toner within the
toner bottle may
have become compacted. If it has, be
sure to shake the
toner bottle until the
toner is mostly broken up before installing the bottle.
6
Shake the new toner
bottle up and down
about five times.
7
Insert the toner bottle
into the toner hopper
with the label on the bottle facing up.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9-5
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
8
Flip down the toner bottle holder so that it locks
into place. Grab the seal
on the toner bottle, and
then slowly pull it off toward you.
9
Insert the toner hopper
until it snaps into place.
10
Close the front door.
2
Reminder
When the front door is closed, toner replenishing begins automatically.
While the toner is being replenished, do not turn the machine off or open
any door of the machine.
!
Detail
If the print is faint immediately after the toner bottle is replaced, replenish
the toner. For details on replenishing toner, refer to “Toner Supply” on
page 11-20.
9-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9.2
9
Replacing the staple cartridge
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, the message shown below appears.
Chapter 9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
!
Detail
Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears,
otherwise the machine may be damaged.
To replace the staple cartridge in finisher
1
Open the front door.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9-7
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Example: Message when the finisher has run out of staples
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
2
Push up the staple cartridge holder, and then
remove it toward you.
3
Press in the area marked
“PUSH” to unlock the
staple cartridge holder.
PU
SH
9-8
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Remove the empty staple cartridge from the
staple cartridge holder.
5
Insert the new staple
cartridge into the staple
cartridge holder.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 9
4
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
9-9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
6
Carefully remove the
stopper.
7
Insert the staple cartridge holder, and then
push it down until it
locks into place.
8
Close the front door.
To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher
1
9-10
Raise the copy output
tray, and then push
down the staple cartridge holder and remove it.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
2
Press in the area marked
“PUSH” to unlock the
staple cartridge holder.
9
Chapter 9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
PU
3
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
SH
Remove the empty staple cartridge from the
staple cartridge holder.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9-11
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
9-12
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
4
Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder.
5
Carefully remove the
stopper.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Insert the staple cartridge holder, and then
push it up until it locks
into place.
–
When inserting the
staple cartridge
holder, be sure to insert it so that it faces
the correct direction.
7
Return the copy output tray to its original position.
8
Pull the handle of the
misfeed-clearing door to
open it, and then close it.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
6
9
Chapter 9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
9-13
9.3
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Clearing a staple jam
If a staple jam occurs, the message shown below appears.
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
For a staple jam in the saddle stitcher:
2
Reminder
Be careful when clearing jammed staples since injuries may result.
Follow the procedure described below to clear jammed staples. If the paper is pulled out with too much force, the stapler unit may be damaged.
9-14
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9
Chapter 9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
1
Remove all paper from
the finisher.
2
Open the front door.
3
Lower lever FN1, and
then remove any paper.
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
To clear jammed staples in finisher
FN1
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9-15
Chapter 9
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
4
Turn dial FN2.
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
FN2
–
5
If the punch unit is installed, pull out the
hole-punch waste
container.
Lower lever FN3, and
then remove any paper.
FN3
6
Return levers FN1 and FN3 to their original positions.
–
9-16
If the punch unit is installed, insert the hole-punch waste container
into its original position.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
7
9
Chapter 9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Lower lever FN4.
8
Turn dial FN5 or dial
FN6, and then pull out
any paper.
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
FN4
FN5
FN6
9
Return lever FN4 to its original position.
10
Turn the dial to the left to
move the stapler toward
the front.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9-17
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
9-18
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
11
Push up the staple cartridge holder, and then
remove it toward you.
12
Raise the shutter of the
staple cartridge holder,
and then pull out one
sheet of staples.
13
Return the shutter to its original position.
14
Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks
into place.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
15
9
Chapter 9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Close the front door.
2
If stapling still cannot be resumed, even after performing the above procedure, contact your technical representative.
To clear jammed staples in the saddle stitcher
1
Open the front door.
2
Lower lever FN1, and
then remove any paper.
FN1
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9-19
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Reminder
Chapter 9
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
3
Turn dial FN2.
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
FN2
–
4
If the punch unit is installed, pull out the
hole-punch waste
container.
Lower lever FN3, and
then remove any paper.
FN3
5
Return levers FN1 and FN3 to their original positions.
–
9-20
If the punch unit is installed, insert the hole-punch waste container
into its original position.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
6
9
Chapter 9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Lower lever FN4.
7
Turn dial FN5 or dial
FN6, and then pull out
any paper.
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
FN4
FN5
FN6
8
Return lever FN4 to its original position.
9
Open the misfeedclearing door, and
then pull out any misfed paper.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9-21
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
10
Raise the copy output
tray, and then push
down the staple cartridge holder and remove it.
11
Raise the shutter of the
staple cartridge holder,
and then pull out one
sheet of staples.
12
Return the shutter to its original position.
13
Insert the staple cartridge holder, and then
push it up until it locks
into place.
–
9-22
When inserting the
staple cartridge
holder, be sure to insert it so that it faces
the correct direction.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Return the copy output tray to its original position.
15
Close the misfeed-clearing door.
16
Close the front door.
Chapter 9
14
9
2
Reminder
If stapling still cannot be resumed, even after performing the above procedure, contact your technical representative.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
9-23
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
9.4
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Emptying the waste containers
If the hole-punch waste container in punch unit installed on finisher becomes
full, the message shown below appears.
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
To empty the hole-punch waste container
Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch waste container.
1
9-24
Open the front door.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Pull out the hole-punch
waste container.
3
Empty the hole-punch
waste container.
4
Insert the hole-punch waste container at its original position.
5
Close the front door.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 9
2
9
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
9-25
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers
Chapter 9
9
9-26
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
10
Care of the machine
Care of the machine
Chapter 10
Care of the machine
10
Care of the machine
10.1
Cleaning
This section describes the procedures for cleaning each part.
Housing
%
Care of the machine
Chapter 10
10
Clean the surface of the
housing by wiping it with
a soft cloth dampened
with a mild household
detergent.
2
Reminder
Be sure to turn off the machine (set the main power switch to “o”) before
cleaning it.
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the housing.
10-2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Care of the machine
10
Original glass
Chapter 10
Clean the surface of the
original glass by wiping it
with a soft, dry cloth.
2
Reminder
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the original
glass.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
10-3
Care of the machine
%
Care of the machine
10
Control panel
Clean the control panel
by wiping it with a soft,
dry cloth.
Care of the machine
Chapter 10
%
2
Reminder
Pressing too hard on a key in the control panel or on the touch panel may
damage them. In addition, never use a mild household detergent, glass
cleaner, benzene or thinner to clean the control panel or touch panel.
!
Detail
When cleaning the control panel, displaying the Panel cleaning screen
may prevent incorrect operations from being performed. For details, refer
to “Panel Cleaning” on page 11-20.
10-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Care of the machine
10
Document pad
Chapter 10
Clean the document pad
by wiping it with a soft
cloth dampened with a
mild household detergent.
Care of the machine
%
Left partition glass
Clean the Left partition glass when the optional ADF is installed.
%
Clean the Left partition
glass by wiping it with a
soft, dry cloth.
2
Reminder
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the Left partition
glass.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
10-5
Care of the machine
10
10.2
Viewing counters (Total Counter)
Chapter 10
The Total Counter screen can be displayed so that the total number of prints
since counting started can be viewed.
To view the contents
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2
Touch [Check Detail].
Care of the machine
1
The Counter screen appears.
3
Touch [Exit], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
In the Counter screen, touch [Fwd] to display the next screen, or touch
[Back] to display the previous screen.
10-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Care of the machine
When the message “Preventative Maintenance is required.” appears
Care of the machine
If the message “Preventative Maintenance is required.” appears, contact
your service representative and request a periodic maintenance inspection.
Chapter 10
10.3
10
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
10-7
Care of the machine
10-8
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Care of the machine
Chapter 10
10
Utility mode
Utility mode
Chapter 11
11
Utility mode
11
11
Utility mode
11.1
Overview of Utility mode parameters
List of registration information and parameters
Chapter 11
This section describes the buttons available when the [Utility/Counter] key is
pressed.
2
Note
Utility mode
The buttons that appear in the screens differ depending on the specified
settings.
Buttons marked with*1 may not appear depending on the specified settings or whether specific options are installed. For details, refer to the
corresponding page for the button.
The names of buttons marked with*2 may be different when fax kit is installed.
For details on the buttons marked with*3, refer to the User’s Guide [Facsimile Operations].
For details on buttons marked with*4, refer to the User’s Guide [Network
Scanner Operations].
For details on buttons marked with*5, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].
For details on the buttons marked with*6, refer to the User’s Guide [Box
Operations].
If user authentication settings have been specified and the [Utility/Counter] key is pressed without performing user authentication, only the buttons marked with*7 appear.
11-2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Utility/Counter
User Setting
User’s Choice
1/6
(p. 11-9)
Mixed Original
Detection
Language Selection
Measurement
Unit Setting
2/6
Chapter 11
Machine Authentication PW Change
Default Setting
Simplex / Duplex
Auto Paper /
Auto Zoom
Priority Tray
Utility mode
Special Paper
Setting
Zoom Ratio for
Combine Booklets
3/6
Low Power
Mode
Sleep Mode
LCD BackLight OFF
Auto Reset
Auto Reset when
Account is changed
4/6
4in1 Copy Order
Default Quality /
Density Modes
Default Copy
Density Levels
Print Density
Default Finishing Mode
5/6
Sort / Non-Sort
Auto Change
Output Tray
Settings*1
Auto Paper Select
for Small Original
Crease / Center Staple*1
6/6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Default Screen
11-3
Utility mode
11
Default Device
Image Quality
(ADF)
E-Mail Input*2
One - Touch
Index
Utility mode
Chapter 11
Mail Program*2
Domain Name*4
Bulletin*1*3
Conf. Box*1*3
Store Overlay
(p. 8-28)
User Management
(p. 11-19)
Confirmation
Beep
Alarm Volume
Line Monitor
Sound*1
Job Complete
Beep
Panel Cleaning
Toner Supply
Memory RX ON
/ OFF *3
POP3 RX *3
Admin. Management *7
(p. 11-21)
Admin. 1
Initial Setting
(p. 11-23)
Date & Time
Setting
Date & Time
Setting
Language for
Communication
Time Zone
Day Light Saving Time
Admin. Set
(p. 11-25)
Self-Telephone #
information *1*3
Self-Telephone
#
TSI Registration
PBX Connection Mode
Self-ID *1*3
Dialing Method
Administrator
Code Input
Max. Copy
Sets
Disable Sleep
Mode
11-4
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Restrict One
Touch Editing *3
Activity Report
E-Mail TX
Account / User
Auth.
User Authentication ON/OFF
External Server
Authentication
*1
General Settings
(p. 11-40)
Domain Setting
Machine Auth.
Setting *1
Change Settings
User Registration
Chapter 11
Allow Print
without Authentication *1
Account Track
Setting *1
Account Data
Utility mode
(p. 11-42)
Reset All
Counters
(p. 11-31)
TX Settings *3
Quality / Mode
Default Quality
Default Density
Communication Mode
Comm. Menu
TX
TSI
TX Time Information
Rotation TX
TSI Selection
2-Sided TX
RX Settings*3
FAX Setting*1*3
Memory RX
Time Setting
Memory Lock
Time
Confidential RX
User Box Delete*1*3
Memory Lock
Password
RX Functions
Reception
Mode
Numbers of RX
Call Rings
Password
Communication
Print Lists*3
Setting List
Report Settings*3
TX Report
Communication Password
Activity Report
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-5
Utility mode
11
Document
Management
TX Document
RX Document
Admin. 2
Network Settings*4
Network Setting 1
Basic Settings
DHCP
IP Address Setting
Chapter 11
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Self-Domain
Name
Network Board
Set
Utility mode
DNS Settings
Machine Name
SMTP Settings
SMTP Server
Address
E-Mail Address
POP3 Settings
POP3 Server
Address
POP3 User
Name
POP3 Password
Auto-RX Check
Priority Compress Level
E-Mail Mode
Scan Mode
Scanner Settings
Activity Report
RX Doc.Header
Print
E-Mail Header
Text
Gateway TX
Subject Registration
Divide Settings
Page Division
Binary Division
11-6
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Binary Division
Size
LDAP Setting
LDAP Search
Frame Type Set
LDAP Server
Setting
IP Filtering
Accept Setting
Network Setting 2
IP Relay Settings*1
IP Relay Station
Registration
IP Relay Station
Setting
Printer Setting*5
Timeout
Software SW
(p. 11-50)
No Matching
Paper in Tray
Setting
Utility mode
Relay Result
Port
Ping*4
Security Setting
Enhance Security*1
Delete Job*4
Unlock
SSL/TLS*4
Memory Management*1*6
Overwrite All
Data
HDD Lock Setting*1
Encryption
Setting*1
Format*1
Reports
TX Report
RX Report
One-Touch List
Program List*3
Index List
Bulletin List*1*3
Confidential
List*1*3
Printer Setting*5
MFP Set
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 11
Deny access
Proof Print Hold
Time
11-7
Utility mode
11
Overwrite
A4← →Letter
Document Hold
Time
PostScript Error
Report
Default Set
Basic
Tray
Chapter 11
Paper Size
Original Direction
Print Method
# of Sets
Utility mode
Font
Font #
Symbol Set
Number Lines
Font Size
CR/LF Mapping
PDL Set
Test Print
Check Detail*7
(p. 10-6)
11-8
Counter
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11.2
11
Specifying User’s Choice settings
From the User’s Choice screens, the default settings (settings selected when
the machine is turned on) can be specified.
The following procedure describes how to display the User’s Choice screens
and specify its settings.
To specify User’s Choice settings
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Chapter 11
1
The Utility/Counter screen appears.
Touch [User Setting].
3
Touch [User’s Choice].
Utility mode
2
The User’s Choice
screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-9
Utility mode
Chapter 11
11
4
Select a tab, and then
select a parameter to be
set.
5
Specify the desired settings, and then touch [Enter].
Utility mode
–
–
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
To exit the User’s Choice screens, touch [Enter] in each screen until
the Basics screen appears.
Mixed Original Detection
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
1/6
Mixed Original Detection
Specify whether or not the “Mixed Original” setting is selected as a default.
OFF
Language Selection
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
1/6
Language Selection
Select one of the following as the language in which messages appear in the
touch panel.
English, French, Spanish, Japanese
English
2
Note
If user authentication is performed to log onto the machine, then the display language is changed, it will no longer be possible to log on to the
machine normally with the next authentication. In this case, it will be necessary to change the software switch settings. For details, contact your
technical representative.
11-10
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
1/6
Measurement Unit
Setting
Select one of the following as the measurement units in which values are displayed in the touch panel.
mm (Num. Value), Inch (Num. Value),
Inch (Fraction)
Inch (Num. Value)
Machine Authentication PW Change
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
1/6
Machine Authentication PW Change
The password entered for machine authentication with user authentication can
be changed.
• Current Password:
Type in the currently specified machine authentication password.
• New Password:
Type in the new machine authentication password.
• Confirm New Password:
Type in the new machine authentication password again for confirmation.
-
Utility mode
Tab
2
Note
This parameter appears only when the machine is being used with the
machine user authentication settings specified.
Default Setting Simplex/Duplex
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
2/6
Default Setting
Simplex/Duplex
Select one of the following as the default
Single/Double-Sided setting.
If the “Simplex -> Duplex” parameter in
the Tech. Rep. Choice screen is set to
“duplex only”, [1→1] does not appear.
For details, contact your technical representative.
1→2, 2→2, 1→1
1→1
Auto Paper/Auto Zoom
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
2/6
Auto Paper/Auto
Zoom
Select one of the following as the default
setting.
Auto Paper Select, Auto Zoom, Manual
Auto Paper Select
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 11
Measurement Unit Setting
11-11
Utility mode
11
Priority Tray
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
2/6
Priority Tray
Select which of the four paper trays is
given priority when the “Auto Paper Select” setting is not selected.
1st tray
Utility mode
Chapter 11
Special Paper Setting
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
2/6
Special Paper Setting
One of the following special paper settings can be selected for each paper
tray. A paper tray set for special paper is
not selected automatically when the
“Auto Paper Select” setting is specified
or when the automatic paper-trayswitching operation is performed and its
priority order is not changed.
Normal, Single Sided Only, Recycled,
Special Paper
Normal
2
Note
If a special setting is specified for a paper tray, the icon for the special
paper setting appears on the button for the paper tray.
!
Detail
For details on the special paper, refer to “Special paper” on page 7-5.
Zoom Ratio for Combine/Booklets
11-12
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
2/6
Zoom Ratio for
Combine/Booklets
Select whether or not the appropriate
zoom ratio is automatically recalled
when an Orig. > Copy setting or the
“Booklet” function is used.
• Recall:
The zoom ratio for the “4-in-1” setting
is ×0.500, and the zoom ratio for the
“2-in-1” setting and the “Booklet”
function is ×0.647.
• Do not Recall:
No zoom ratio is selected automatically.
Recall
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Low Power Mode
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
3/6
Low Power Mode
Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Low Power mode.
15 minutes
Parameter
Description
Default setting
3/6
Sleep Mode
Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode.
1 minute
!
Detail
If the “Disable Sleep Mode” parameter in Administrator Management is
set to “Yes”, [OFF] appears and users can select whether or not the Sleep
mode is disabled. For details, refer to “Disable Sleep Mode” on
page 11-26.
LCD Back-Light OFF
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
3/6
LCD Back-Light
OFF
Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the touch
panel automatically goes off.
1 minute
Auto Reset
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
3/6
Auto Reset
Select the desired length of time until the
automatic panel reset operation is performed and all settings return to their defaults.
This parameter cannot be set to “OFF” if
“Enhance Security” is set to “ON” and a
user is logged on while user authentication settings are specified. If this parameter was set to “OFF” before “Enhance
Security” is set to “ON”, the setting for
this parameter changes to “1 min.” when
“Enhance Security” is set to “ON”.
30 seconds, 1 min., 2 min., 3 min., 5
min., OFF
1 min.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-13
Utility mode
Tab
Chapter 11
Sleep Mode
Utility mode
11
Auto Reset when Account is changed
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
3/6
Auto Reset when
Account is
changed
Select whether or not the settings are reset to their defaults when an access
code is entered or the key counter has
been removed.
ON
Utility mode
Chapter 11
4in1 Copy Order
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
4/6
4in1 Copy Order
Select one of the following as the page
order when the “4-in-1” Orig. > Copy
setting is selected.
Upper left→Upper right→Lower
left→Lower right, Upper left→Lower
left→Upper right→Lower right
Upper left→Upper
right→Lower
left→Lower right
Default Quality/Density Modes
Tab
Parameter
4/6
Default
Quality/
Density
Modes
Description
Default setting
Density
Select one of the following as the default
copy density setting.
Auto, Manual
Auto
Original
Type
Select one of the following as the default
original type setting.
Text, Photo,
Text & Photo, Dot Matrix
Text
Default Copy Output Levels
11-14
Tab
Parameter
4/6
Default
Copy
Output
Levels
Description
Default setting
For Auto
Mode:
Select one of the following as the
default copy density setting when
the setting is specified automatically.
Lighter, Std., Darker
Std.
For Manual
Mode:
Touch [Light] and [Dark] to select
one of the nine levels for the default
copy density when the setting is
specified manually.
Middle of the nine
levels
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Print Density
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
4/6
Print Density
Select one of the following as the default
printing density.
-2, -1, 0, 1, 2
0
Parameter
Description
Default setting
4/6
Default Finishing
Mode
Select one of the following as the default
sorting setting.
Non-Sort, Sort, Group
Non-Sort
Select one of the following as the default
Finishing setting.
Corner Staple,
2 Staples, 2-Hole Punch, 3-Hole Punch
Not specified
Utility mode
Tab
2
Note
[Corner Staple] and [2 Staples] appear only if optional finisher is installed.
[Hole Punch] appears only if optional punch unit is installed.
Sort/Non-Sort Auto Change
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
5/6
Sort/Non-Sort Auto
Change
Select whether the “Sort” or “Uncollated” setting is automatically selected according to the number of copy pages.
ON
!
Detail
If the “Sort/Non-Sort Auto Change” parameter is set to “ON”, the “Uncollated” setting is selected when only one page was copied, and the “Sort”
setting is selected when two or more pages are copied.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 11
Default Finishing Mode
11-15
Utility mode
11
Output Tray Settings
Parameter
5/6
Output
Tray
Settings
Chapter 11
Tab
Faxes/
Prints
Utility mode
Copier/
Printer
Description
Default setting
Fax
Select the output tray for data received at the fax port.
1 (output tray 1)
Port 2
Select the output tray for data received at port 2 when the multi
port is installed.
1 (output tray 1)
Faxes/
Prints
Select the output tray for data received from the network.
1 (output tray 1)
Printer
Specify the output tray for computer printouts.
1 (output tray 1)
Copies
Specify the output tray for copies.
2 (output tray 2;
when the job
separator is installed)
1 (output tray 1;
when the finisher is installed)
!
Detail
If the optional output tray are installed on the finisher, the factory default
setting for “Copy” is “3” (optional output tray).
2
Note
The “Output Tray Settings” parameter appears only if optional finisher or
job separator is installed.
Auto Paper Select for Small Orig.
11-16
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
5/6
Auto Paper Select
for Small Original
Select whether or not to specify a paper
tray when the “Auto Paper Select” setting is selected and either no document
is placed on the original glass or the document placed on the original glass is
smaller than 5-3/4 × 8-1/4.
• ON:
Copies are produced using the paper
given priority.
• Prohibit Copy:
The screen for selecting a paper tray
is displayed.
ON
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Crease/Center Staple
Parameter
Description
Default setting
5/6
Crease/
Center Staple
Specify the crease and center staple position for each paper size.
Select a paper size to be set, and then
touch [Enter].
• Crease:
Specify the position of the fold (between -10 and +10).
• Center Staple:
Specify the position of the center staple (between -10 and +10).
Crease: 0
Center Staple: 0
Chapter 11
Tab
2
The “Crease/Center Staple” parameter appears only if optional finisher or
saddle stitcher is installed.
Default Screen
Tab
Parameter
6/6
Default
Screen
Description
Default setting
Default
LCD
Screen
Select one of the following as the
mode screen given priority.
Copy, E-Mail, Scanner
Copy
Default Email
Screen
Select one of the following as the
Fax mode screen given priority.
One-Touch, Search, Address Input, Index
One-Touch
2
Note
The names of parameters and settings may be different when fax kit is
installed.
!
Detail
The Default LCD Screen setting specifies the default screen when the automatic panel reset operation is performed or the machine is turned off,
then on again.
In order to check the setting after it has been changed, turn the machine
off with the main power switch, and then wait about 10 seconds before
turning it on again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned
on immediately after being turned off. For details on turning the machine
off and on, refer to “Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power”
on page 2-22.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-17
Utility mode
Note
Utility mode
11
Default Device
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
6/6
Default Device
Select one of the following as the mode
given priority.
Copy, Printer
Copy
Utility mode
Chapter 11
Image Quality (ADF)
11-18
Tab
Parameter
Description
Default setting
6/6
Image Quality
(ADF)
Select one of the following as the image
quality level for the ADF.
• Left:
Mode1 (for density correction)
For reproducing faint documents,
such as those written in pencil
• Right:
Mode2 (standard)
For normal documents
Left:
Mode1 (for density
correction)
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11.3
11
Specifying User Management settings
From the User Management screen, settings for more comfortable use of the
machine can be specified, such as the volume.
The following procedure describes how to display the User Management
screen and specify its settings.
To specify user management settings
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Chapter 11
1
The Utility/Counter screen appears.
2
Touch [User Management].
3
Select a parameter to be
set.
4
Specify the desired settings, and then touch [Enter].
–
–
Utility mode
The User Management
screen appears.
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
To exit the User Management screen, touch [Enter] in each screen
until the Basics screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-19
Utility mode
11
!
Detail
For details on the “Print Management” and “POP3 RX” parameters, refer
to the User’s Guide [Facsimile Operations].
Tone volume parameters
Utility mode
Chapter 11
In the User Management screen, sound levels can be specified for the “Confirmation Beep”, “Alarm Volume”, “Line Monitor Sound”, and “Job Complete
Beep” parameters.
Parameter
Description
Default setting
Confirmation Beep
Specify the volume (between 0 and 5) of the
tone produced when a key is pressed.
3
Alarm Volume
Specify the volume (between 0 and 5) of the
tone produced when an alarm is sounded.
3
Line Monitor Sound
Specify the volume (between 0 and 5) of the
sound produced when a transmission is being monitored.
3
Job Complete Beep
Specify the volume (between 0 and 5) of the
tone produced when a job is completed.
3
2
Note
The “Line Monitor Sound” parameter appears only if the optional fax kit
is installed.
Panel Cleaning
Parameter
Description
Panel Cleaning
A screen is displayed so the control panel can be cleaned.
2
Note
To exit the Panel Cleaning screen, press the [Reset] key.
Toner Supply
11-20
Parameter
Description
Toner Supply
Select this parameter if the copies have become faint, for example, immediately after the toner bottle is replaced or after copying a large
quantity of documents with large printed areas.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11.4
11
Displaying the Administrator Management screen
In order to change Administrator Management settings, display the Administrator Management screen.
2
Be sure to keep the administrator access code in a safe place. If the administrator access code is lost while “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”,
Administrator Management settings can no longer be specified. In this
case, the administrator access code cannot be specified again. For details, contact your technical representative.
1
Utility mode
To display the Administrator Management screen
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
The Utility/Counter screen appears.
2
Touch [Admin. Management].
The Administrator Code
screen appears.
3
Use the keypad to type
in the 8-digit administrator access code, and
then touch [Enter].
–
To change the entered value, press
the [C] (clear) key,
and then enter the
correct value.
– To cancel changes to
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
The Administrator Management screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 11
Reminder
11-21
Utility mode
11
4
Touch [Admin. 1] or [Admin. 2].
Chapter 11
–
To exit the Administrator Management
screen, touch [Enter]
in each screen until
the Basics screen
appears.
Utility mode
The Administrator Management 1 or Administrator Management 2
screen appears.
Administrator Management 1 screen
Administrator Management 2 screen
!
Detail
For details on the administrator access code, refer to “Administrator
Code Input” on page 11-26.
11-22
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11.5
11
Specifying Initial Settings
From the Initial Settings screen, the date and time and time zone can be
specified.
The following procedure describes how to display the Initial Settings screen
and specify its settings.
Display the Administrator Management 1 screen, and then touch [Initial
Settings].
–
For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen,
refer to “Displaying the Administrator Management screen” on
page 11-21.
The Initial Settings screen appears.
2
Select a parameter to be
set.
3
Specify the desired settings, and then touch [Enter].
–
–
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
To exit the Initial Settings screen, touch [Enter] in each screen until
the Basics screen appears.
!
Detail
For details on specifying parameters other than the “Date & Time Setting”
parameter, refer to the User’s Guide [Facsimile Operations].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-23
Utility mode
1
Chapter 11
To specify initial settings
Utility mode
11
Date & Time Setting
Parameter
Default setting
Date & Time
Setting
Specify the year, month, day, hour (24hour time format), and minutes for the
machine’s internal clock.
-
Time Zone
Specify the time zone (between -12:00
and +13:00 in 30-minute increments).
-
Day Light
Saving Time
Specify whether or not the machine’s internal clock will follow daylight saving
time.
-
Utility mode
Chapter 11
Date & Time
Setting
Description
11-24
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11.6
11
Specifying Administrator settings
From the Administrator Set screen, the administrator access code can be
changed or limits can be specified on the number of copies allowed.
The following procedure describes how to display the Administrator Set
screen and specify its settings.
Display the Administrator Management 1 screen, and then touch [Admin. Set].
–
For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen,
refer to “Displaying the Administrator Management screen” on
page 11-21.
The Administrator Set screen appears.
2
Select a parameter to be
set.
3
Specify the desired settings, and then touch [Enter].
–
–
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
To exit the Administrator Set screen, touch [Enter] in each screen
until the Basics screen appears.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the “Restrict One-Touch Editing”, “One-Touch”
and “Activity Report E-Mail TX” parameters, refer to the User’s Guide
[Facsimile Operations].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-25
Utility mode
1
Chapter 11
To specify administrator settings
Utility mode
11
Chapter 11
Administrator Code Input
Parameter
Description
Default setting
Administrator Code Input
The 8-digit administrator access code
entered in the Administrator Code
screen can be changed.
• Current Code:
Type in the currently specified administrator access code.
• New Code:
Type in the new administrator access
code.
• Retype New Code:
Type in the new administrator access
code again for confirmation.
12345678
Utility mode
2
Note
To change the entered value, press the [C] (clear) key, and then enter the
correct value.
Max. Copy Sets
Parameter
Description
Default setting
Max. Copy Sets
Specify the number of copies that can be
specified (between 1 and 99 or “OFF”).
OFF
Parameter
Description
Default setting
Disable Sleep Mode
Select whether or not the setting for disabling Sleep mode is available.
This parameter does not appear if user
authentication settings have been specified on this machine.
No
Disable Sleep Mode
11-26
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11.7
11
Specifying the account/authentication settings (User
Authentication ON/OFF parameters)
The following procedure describes how to specify settings in the User Authentication ON/OFF screen.
!
Detail
If an authentication method is set, the authentication screen is displayed
while this machine is in standby. In order to use this machine when user
authentication or account track settings are specified, the user/account
name and password must be entered. For details, refer to “Controlling
machine use with user authentication (machine authentication)” on
page 2-30.
User authentication and account track can be used at the same time. In
addition, specified user authentication and account track settings can be
synchronized.
To specify the account/authentication settings
0 The user authentication status (“ON (External Server)” or “ON (MFP)”) or
“Account Track”, whichever was specified in the User Authentication ON/
OFF screen, appears in the Account/Authentication screen.
1
Display the Administrator Management 1 screen, and then touch [Account/User Auth.].
–
For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen,
refer to “Displaying the Administrator Management screen” on
page 11-21.
The Account/Authentication screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-27
Utility mode
User authentication settings are specified to manage individuals, and account track settings are specified to manage groups of users.
- User authentication can be performed by the machine or by an external
server.
- With machine authentication, the number of prints and scans made by
each user can be counted.
- With external server authentication, the personal boxes of each user can
be managed.
- By specifying account track settings, the number of prints and scans
made by each account can be counted and limits can be specified on the
number of prints allowed.
Chapter 11
User authentication and account track settings can be specified to control
the use of this machine.
Utility mode
11
2
Touch [User Authentication ON/OFF].
Chapter 11
The User Authentication
ON/OFF screen appears.
Utility mode
3
Specify the desired settings, and then touch
[Enter].
–
Specify settings for
the “User Authentication”, “Account
Track” and “Synchronize” parameters. The
“Synchronize” parameter can be specified only if the “User
Authentication” and “Account Track” parameters have been set.
For details on specifying the settings, refer to “Specifying account
data settings” on page 11-31 and “Specifying user authentication
settings” on page 11-38.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
A screen appears, requesting confirmation to change the settings.
11-28
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
4
11
Touch [Yes], and then
touch [Enter].
User Authentication ON/OFF
Parameter
Description
Default setting
User Auth. Setting
Specify whether or not user authentication settings are to be applied. Select
one of the following as the user authentication method.
• ON (External Server):
Select this setting to apply the user
authentication function of an external
server.
• ON (MFP):
Select this setting to apply the machine’s user authentication function.
• OFF:
Select this setting to apply no user authentication function.
OFF
Account Track
Select whether or not account track settings are to be applied.
OFF
Synchronize
Select whether or not use of the machine
is controlled with user authentication
and account track synchronized.
OFF
Allow Print without Authentication
Parameter
Description
Default setting
Allow Print without Authentication
Select whether or not to permit printing
of data with no user and account specified during computer printing while the
user is logged on with user authentication or account track settings have been
specified on the machine.
OFF
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-29
Utility mode
If [Yes], then [Enter]
was touched, the
machine is restarted
and all account track
and user authentication data is initialized.
– To exit the Account/
Authentication
screen, touch [Enter]
in each screen until
the Basics screen appears.
Restart the machine, and then the login screen appears after the machine has finished warming up.
Chapter 11
–
Utility mode
11
2
Note
Utility mode
Chapter 11
The “Allow Print without Authentication” parameter does not appear if
“ON (External Server)” was selected in the User Authentication ON/OFF
screen.
11-30
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11.8
11
Specifying account data settings
A password and the number of prints allowed can be specified and the
counters can be controlled for each account using this machine.
The following procedure describes how to display the desired account.
0 [Account Track Setting] appear only if the “Account Track” parameter is
set to “ON”.
0 A maximum of 1,000 accounts can be registered on this machine.
1
Display the Administrator Management 1 screen, and then touch [Account/User Auth.].
–
2
Touch [Account Track
Setting].
The Account Data
screen appears.
3
Touch the button for the
range of accounts that
includes the desired account.
–
To immediately display the desired account, touch
[Account #], and then
use the keypad to
type in the account
number.
The screen for the selected range of account numbers appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-31
Utility mode
For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen,
refer to “Displaying the Administrator Management screen” on
page 11-21.
The Account/Authentication screen appears.
Chapter 11
To display the desired account
Utility mode
11
4
Select an account
number.
–
Chapter 11
–
Select a tab, and
then touch the button for the desired
account number.
To exit the Account/
Authentication
screen, touch [Enter]
in each screen until
the Basics screen
appears.
To register an account
Utility mode
The account name, password, and number of prints allowed can be specified
for each account using this machine.
0 A maximum of 1,000 accounts can be registered on this machine.
0 If user authentication and account track are synchronized, 100 accounts
can be managed.
1
Display the Account Data screen, and then select an available account
number.
–
For details on displaying the Account Registr. screen, refer to
“Specifying account data settings” on page 11-31.
The Account Registr. screen appears.
2
Touch [Account Name].
The Account Name
screen appears.
11-32
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
3
11
Type in the account
name (up to 8 characters
long), and then touch
[Enter].
To cancel changes to
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
– For details on typing
in text, refer to “Entering text” on
page 12-2.
The Account Registr. screen appears again.
Touch [Password].
Utility mode
4
Chapter 11
–
The Change Password screen appears.
5
Type in the password
(up to 8 characters long),
and then touch [Enter].
–
Touch [New Password], type the new
password into the
screen that appeared, and then
touch [Enter].
– Touch [Confirm New
Password], type the
new password again
into the screen that appeared, and then touch [Enter].
– To change the password, touch [Current Password], type the current password into the screen that appeared, and then touch [Enter].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
– For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 12-2.
The Account Registr. screen appears again.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-33
Utility mode
11
6
Touch [Max. Print Limit].
The Max. Print Limit screen appears.
Chapter 11
7
Touch
and
to
move the cursor to the
value to be changed,
and then use the keypad
to specify the maximum
number of prints allowed.
Utility mode
–
–
–
8
The maximum
number of prints allowed can be set between 0 and
999,999.
If “0” is specified, there is no limit on the number of prints allowed.
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next two screens that appear.
–
To exit the Account/Authentication screen, touch [Enter] in each
screen until the Basics screen appears.
The screen for selecting an account number appears again.
The new account is registered.
2
Note
The account name appears on the button for the registered account
number.
To manage an account
The settings for registered accounts can be changed and the counters can
be controlled.
0 The list of print counters for each account can be printed by pressing the
[Start] key while the Detail screen is displayed.
1
Display the Account Data screen, and then select the desired account
number.
–
For details on displaying the Detail screen for an account, refer to
“Specifying account data settings” on page 11-31.
The Detail screen appears.
11-34
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
–
–
–
–
–
3
Touch [General Settings] to display the
Account Registr.
screen, and then
change the settings.
For details on changing settings in the
Account Registr.
screen, refer to “To
register an account”
on page 11-32.
Touch [Clear Counter] to display a message confirming that the
counters will be reset. To reset all counters for the selected account
to 0, touch [Yes].
Touch [Counter] to
Counter screen
display the Counter
screen, which contains the counters for
the selected account.
In the Counter
screen, touch [Fwd]
to display the next
screen, or touch
[Back] to display the
previous screen.
Touch [Exit], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
–
To exit the Account/Authentication screen, touch [Enter] in each
screen until the Basics screen appears.
The screen for selecting an account number appears again.
2
Note
In the screen for selecting an account number, touch [Reset All
Counters], then [Yes], and then touch [Enter] to reset all counters for all
accounts to 0.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-35
Chapter 11
Select the desired settings.
Utility mode
2
11
Utility mode
11
To delete an account
1
Display the Account Data screen, and then select the desired account
number.
–
For details on displaying the Detail screen for an account, refer to
“Specifying account data settings” on page 11-31.
The Detail screen appears.
Chapter 11
2
Touch [Delete Account].
Utility mode
–
3
If this machine is being used with account track settings
specified, [Delete Account] does not appear for accounts
that have been authenticated.
Touch [Yes], touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen
that appears.
–
To exit the Account/
Authentication
screen, touch [Enter]
in each screen until
the Basics screen
appears.
The screen for selecting
an account number appears again.
The account is deleted.
11-36
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Allowing printing without authentication
1
Display the Administrator Management 1 screen, and then touch [Account/User Auth.].
For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen,
refer to “Displaying the Administrator Management screen” on
page 11-21.
The Account/Authentication screen appears.
2
Chapter 11
–
Touch [Allow Print without Authentication].
Utility mode
The Allow Print without
Authentication screen
appears.
3
Touch [ON], and then
touch [Enter].
–
If “ON” is selected,
printing is possible
regardless of whether an account is
specified.
– If “OFF” is selected,
a document cannot
be printed if no account is specified.
– To cancel changes to
the settings, touch [Cancel].
The Account/Authentication screen appears again.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-37
Utility mode
11
11.9
Specifying user authentication settings
User authentication can be performed by the external server or by the machine. With external server authentication, limitations can be placed on the
users who have access to this machine. With machine authentication, a
password can be specified for each user and their counters can be controlled.
To display the User Authentication screen
Utility mode
Chapter 11
0 If “ON (External Server)” was selected in the User Authentication ON/OFF
screen, [External Server Authentication] appears in the Account/Authentication screen. If “ON (MFP)” was selected, [Machine Auth. Setting] appears in the Account/Authentication screen. For details, refer to
“Specifying the account/authentication settings (User Authentication
ON/OFF parameters)” on page 11-27.
0 A maximum of 100 users can be registered on this machine.
1
Display the Administrator Management 1 screen, and then touch [Account/User Auth.].
–
For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen,
refer to “Displaying the Administrator Management screen” on
page 11-21.
The Account/Authentication screen appears.
2
Touch [External Server Authentication] or [Machine Auth. Setting].
–
11-38
To exit the User Authentication screen,
touch [Enter] in each
screen until the Basics screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
External server authentication settings
Chapter 11
The User Authentication
screen for either external
server authentication or
machine authentication
appears.
Utility mode
Machine authentication settings
!
Detail
Depending on the network environment, it may take some time to log on
with external server authentication. Selecting the following settings may
reduce the logon time.
-Specify a server compatible with Active Directory for DNS server address 1.
-With DNS server address 1, register an SRV record for LDAP and Kerberos for a server compatible with Active Directory.
For more details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-39
Utility mode
11
To register a user with external server authentication
A user can be registered when external server authentication is used.
1
Display the User Authentication screen for external server authentication.
–
Chapter 11
2
For details on displaying the User Authentication screen, refer to
“Specifying user authentication settings” on page 11-38.
Touch [General Settings].
Utility mode
The General Settings
screen appears.
3
Select the authentication
system, and then touch
[Enter].
–
To cancel changes to
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
– If the software switch
settings are specified
to synchronize external server authentication and LDAP
authentication, select “Active Directory”. For details on the software switch settings,
refer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)”
on page 11-50.
The User Authentication screen appears again.
11-40
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
4
11
Touch [Domain Setting].
5
Perform the desired operation.
–
To register a new domain name, select an empty button, and then
touch [Change Setting].
– To change the name of a registered domain, select the button of the
domain whose name is to be changed, and then touch [Change
Setting].
– To delete a registered domain name, select the button of the domain to be deleted, and then touch [Delete].
– To check the connection with an external server, select the button
of a registered domain name, and then touch [Check Connection].
The Domain Name screen appears.
6
Type in the domain
name, and then touch
[Enter].
–
–
If “NDS” was selected in the Authentication System screen,
[Tree Name] and
[Context Name] appear instead of [Domain Name]. Touch
[Tree Name] or [Context Name], type in
the tree name or context name, and then touch [Enter].
For details on the domain name, tree name, and context name, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-41
Utility mode
If a domain name is
already registered,
touch [Default Domain Name] in the
User Authentication
screen for external
server authentication, and then select
the default domain
name.
– The domain name
registered in the first line (upper left) of the Domain Setting screen
is the default.
– A maximum of 10 domain names can be registered with Active Directory.
The Domain Setting screen appears.
Chapter 11
–
Utility mode
11
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
– For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 12-2.
The Domain Setting screen appears again.
7
Touch [Enter].
The User Authentication screen appears again.
Chapter 11
8
Touch [Enter].
–
To exit the Account/Authentication screen, touch [Enter] in each
screen until the Basics screen appears.
The external server user is registered.
To register a user with machine authentication
Utility mode
A user can be registered when machine authentication is used.
0 A maximum of 100 users can be registered on this machine.
1
Display the User Authentication screen for machine authentication.
–
2
For details on displaying the User Authentication screen, refer to
“Specifying user authentication settings” on page 11-38.
Touch [User Registration].
A screen for selecting a
user number appears.
11-42
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
3
11
Select a user number.
Select a tab, and
then touch the button for an available
user number.
– To immediately display the desired user,
touch [User
Number], and then
use the keypad to
type in the user
number.
The User Reg. screen appears.
Touch [User Information].
Utility mode
4
Chapter 11
–
The User Info. screen
appears.
5
Touch [User Name].
–
If machine authentication and account
track are synchronized, [Account
Name] appears in the
User Info. screen.
Touch [Account
Name], and then
specify the number
of the account to be
synchronized. For
details on specifying account numbers, refer to “Specifying account data settings” on page 11-31.
The User Name screen appears.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-43
Utility mode
11
6
Type in the user name
(up to 64 characters
long), and then touch
[Enter].
To cancel changes to
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
The User Info. screen
appears again.
Chapter 11
–
7
Touch [User Password].
Utility mode
The password screen appears.
8
Type in the password
(up to 32 characters
long), touch [Enter], and
then touch [Enter] in the
next screen that appears.
–
Touch [New Password], type the new
password into the
screen that appeared, and then
touch [Enter].
– Touch [Confirm New Password], type the new password again into
the screen that appeared, and then touch [Enter].
– To change the password, touch [Current Password], type the current password into the screen that appeared, and then touch [Enter].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
– For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 12-2.
The User Information screen appears again.
11-44
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
9
11
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
2
Note
The user name appears on the button for the registered user number.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-45
Utility mode
If a network is connected, touch [Network Info.], and then specify
settings for “E-Mail Address”, “POP3 User Name”, “POP3 Password”, “SMTP User Name”, and “SMTP Password”. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
– The software switch settings can be specified so that user names
and passwords registered with user authentication can be used in
LDAP searches. For details on the software switch settings, refer to
“Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 11-50. For details on LDAP searches, refer to the User’s
Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
– To exit the User Authentication screen, touch [Enter] in each screen
until the Basics screen appears.
A screen for selecting a user number appears again.
The machine authentication user is registered.
Chapter 11
–
Utility mode
11
To manage a user for machine authentication
The settings for registered machine authentication users can be changed
and the counters can be controlled.
1
Display the User Authentication screen for machine authentication.
–
Chapter 11
2
For details on displaying the User Authentication screen, refer to
“Specifying user authentication settings” on page 11-38.
Touch [User Registration].
Utility mode
A screen for selecting a
user number appears.
3
Select the desired user
number.
–
Select a tab, and
then touch the button for the desired
user number.
– To immediately display the desired user,
touch [User
Number], and then
use the keypad to
type in the user
number.
The User Information screen appears.
11-46
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
5
Touch [General Settings] to display the
User Registration
screen, and then
change the settings.
For details on changing settings for machine authentication
users, refer to “To
register a user with
machine authentication” on page 11-42.
The list of print counters for each account can be printed by pressing the [Start] key while the Detail screen is displayed.
The list of print counters can be printed if only user authentication
settings have been specified.
Touch [Clear Counter] to display a message confirming that the
counters will be reset. To reset all counters for the selected user to
0, touch [Yes].
Touch [Counter] to
Counter screen
display the Counter
screen, which contains the counters for
the selected user.
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next screen that appears.
–
To exit the User Authentication screen, touch [Enter] in each screen
until the Basics screen appears.
A screen for selecting a user number appears again.
2
Note
In the User Information screen or Counter screen, touch [Fwd] to display
the next screen, or touch [Back] to display the previous screen.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-47
Chapter 11
Select the desired settings.
Utility mode
4
11
Utility mode
11
To delete a user for machine authentication
1
Display the User Authentication screen for machine authentication.
–
2
For details on displaying the User Authentication screen, refer to
“Specifying user authentication settings” on page 11-38.
Touch [User Registration].
To immediately display the desired user,
touch [User
Number], and then
use the keypad to
type in the user
number.
A screen for selecting a
user number appears.
Utility mode
Chapter 11
–
3
Select the desired user
number.
–
Select a tab, and
then touch the button for the desired
user number.
The User Information
screen appears.
4
Touch [Delete User].
–
11-48
If this machine is being used with machine authentication
settings specified,
[Delete User] does
not appear for users
that have been authenticated.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
5
11
Select [Yes], and then
touch [Enter].
To exit the User Authentication screen,
touch [Enter] in each
screen until the Basics screen appears.
A screen for selecting a
user number appears
again.
Utility mode
Chapter 11
–
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-49
Utility mode
11
11.10 Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)
By specifying the software switch settings (“Mode Selection”, “Bit Selection”
and “Hex Selection”), various machine functions can be changed to meet
your specific needs.
2
Chapter 11
Reminder
Do not change any modes or bits other than those described in this manual.
2
Utility mode
Note
When “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”, the software switch settings
cannot be changed.
Software SW settings
Parameter
Description
Mode Selection
Specify the three-digit number for the parameter that you wish
to specify with the software switch settings.
Bit Selection
The bits are the eight numbers that construct the mode. By
specifying a binary number (0 or 1) for each of the bits (0
through 7), each function can be specified.
HEX Selection
Specify a setting for each mode as a hexadecimal number (0
through 9 and A through F).
For example, to specify the bit setting “0011 0000”, specify
the hexadecimal setting “30”.
Reference: Examples of “Bit Selection” binary numbers and “HEX Selection”
hexadecimal numbers
11-50
Decimal number
“Bit Selection” setting (binary number)
“HEX Selection” setting
(hexadecimal number)
0
0000 0000
00
1
0000 0001
01
2
0000 0010
02
3
0000 0011
03
4
0000 0100
04
5
0000 0101
05
6
0000 0110
06
7
0000 0111
07
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
“Bit Selection” setting (binary number)
“HEX Selection” setting
(hexadecimal number)
8
0000 1000
08
9
0000 1001
09
10
0000 1010
0A
11
0000 1011
0B
12
0000 1100
0C
13
0000 1101
0D
14
0000 1110
0E
15
0000 1111
0F
16
0001 0000
10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
255
1111 1111
FF
Utility mode
Chapter 11
Decimal number
To specify a software switch setting
1
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 2].
2
Touch [Software SW].
The soft SW Setting
screen appears.
3
Touch [Mode Selection],
and then use the keypad
to type in the mode
number.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-51
Utility mode
11
Touch either [Bit Selection] or [HEX Selection],
and then specify the setting.
–
To specify the bits,
touch [Bit Selection],
touch
and
to move the cursor to the bit to be
changed, press either the [0] or [1] key
in the keypad to
specify the bit, and then touch [Enter].
–
To specify the hex
value, touch [HEX
Selection], specify
the value by either
using the keypad or
touching [A] through
[F], and then touch
[Enter].
Utility mode
Chapter 11
4
5
To change the setting for a different mode, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6
Touch [Enter] in each screen until the initial screen appears.
7
Turn the machine off, then on again.
2
Reminder
When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait about 10
seconds after turning the machine off before turning it on again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being
turned off.
11-52
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Specifying permissions for copy functions (mode 307)
The machine can be set so that copy functions cannot be used. In this case,
the Basics screen does not appear, even after the [Copy] key is pressed.
76543210
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying the setting
The shaded cells indicate the settings selected at the time of purchase.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
7
Specify whether or
not copy functions
can be used.
0
Specifies that copy
functions can be
used.
1
Specifies that copy
functions cannot be
used.
0000000
*
Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
-----------------------
Specifying the enlarged display method (mode 311)
Specify the method for displaying enlargements of screens.
Settings at time of purchase
Bit
76543210
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying the setting
The shaded cells indicate the settings selected at the time of purchase.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
7
-----------------------
0
*Do not change this
bit when specifying
settings for this function.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-53
Utility mode
Bit
Chapter 11
Settings at time of purchase
Utility mode
11
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
6
Specify whether to
enlarge the upper-left
corner of the screen
or wait for instructions on the area to
display enlarged
when the [Enlarge
Display] key is
pressed.
0
Waits for instructions
on the area of the
screen to be displayed enlarged.
1
Enlarges the upperleft corner of the
screen.
-----------------------
000000
*
Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
Chapter 11
5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
Utility mode
Specifying that the “Auto Paper Select” setting and the “Auto Zoom”
setting can be selected at the same time (mode 403)
If a paper tray is selected while the “Auto Paper Select” setting is specified,
the “Auto Zoom” setting can be set automatically.
Settings at time of purchase
Bit
76543210
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (HEX: 01)
Specifying the setting
The shaded cells indicate the settings selected at the time of purchase.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
7
-----------------------
0
*
Do not change this
bit when specifying
settings for this function.
6
Specifies the units
used to display and
specify lengths
shown in the screens.
0
The “Auto Zoom” setting cannot be specified at the same time.
1
The “Auto Zoom” setting can be specified
at the same time.
-----------------------
000001
*Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
11-54
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Specifying the measurement units (mode 426)
Specify the units used to display and specify lengths shown in the screens.
Settings at time of purchase
Bit
76543210
Setting
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 50)
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
7, 6, 5
-----------------------
010
*Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
4, 3
Specifies the units
used to display and
specify lengths
shown in the screens.
00
Displayed in millimeters (mm)
01
Displayed in inches
(decimals)
10
Displayed in inches
(fractions)
000
*
Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
2, 1, 0
-----------------------
Specifying settings when copying is finished using the ADF (mode 429)
Specify whether or not all settings are reset when copying is finished using
the ADF.
Settings at time of purchase
Bit
76543210
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying the setting
The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
7, 6
-----------------------
00
*
Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-55
Utility mode
The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase.
Chapter 11
Specifying the setting
Utility mode
11
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
5
Specify whether or
not all settings in the
Basics screen are reset when copying is
finished using the
ADF.
0
Automatic panel reset
operation is not performed.
1
Automatic panel reset
operation is performed.
-----------------------
00000
*
Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
Chapter 11
4, 3, 2, 1, 0
Specifying the pressing of the [Access] key when logging off (mode 438)
Select whether or not the [Access] key be pressed when logging off.
Utility mode
Settings at time of purchase
Bit
76543210
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying the setting
The shaded cells indicate the settings selected at the time of purchase.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
7, 6, 5
-----------------------
000
*
Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
4
Specify whether or
not the [Access] key
be pressed when logging off.
0
Specifies that the [Access] key not be
pressed when logging
off.
1
Specifies that the [Access] key be pressed
when logging off.
0000
*Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
3, 2, 1, 0
-----------------------
Specifying use of registered user authentication information to log on to
the LDAP server (mode 466)
Specify whether or not user names and passwords registered with user authentication are used to log on to the LDAP server.
Settings at time of purchase
11-56
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
Bit
76543210
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying the setting
Description
Setting
Description
7
Select whether or not
the user name/password used for external server
authentication is used
to log on to the LDAP
server.
0
Not used for logon
1
Used for logon
-----------------------
0000000
*
Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
!
Detail
The information for the LDAP server to be connected to must be registered in order to use the LDAP server. In addition, when LDAP and user
authentication is synchronized, select “Active Directory” as the user authentication method. Select “GSS-SPNEGO” as the LDAP authentication
method. For details on the user authentication method, refer to “To register a user with external server authentication” on page 11-40. For details on the LDAP authentication method, refer to the User’s Guide
[Network Scanner Operations].
Specifying whether to enable access locks and password rules, and
specifying the method for deleting image data (mode 469)
Specify whether to lock access if the password is entered incorrectly, specify
whether to apply the password rules, and specify the method for deleting image data.
Settings at the time of purchase
Bit
76543210
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying the settings
The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-57
Utility mode
Bit
Chapter 11
The shaded cells indicate the settings selected at the time of purchase.
Utility mode
11
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
7
Specify whether to
lock access when a
password (account
track and administrator passwords) is entered incorrectly three
times.
0
Does not lock access
1
Locks access
Specify whether or
not image data on the
hard disk is overwritten to delete it.*1
0
Image data on the
hard disk is not overwritten when it is deleted.
1
Image data on the
hard disk is overwritten when it is deleted.
Utility mode
Chapter 11
6
5
---------------------
0
*Do not change this
bit when specitying
settings for this function.
4
For security, specify
whether to apply a
password rule.
0
Do not apply a password rule
3, 2, 1, 0
*1
---------------------
1
Apply a password rule
0000
*
Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
This setting is applied after the machine is turned off, then on again.
!
Detail
If “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”, the access lock, password rules and
overwriting of temporary data are enabled. For details on the “Enhance
Security” parameter, refer to “Specifying security settings (Security Setting parameters)” on page 11-62.
The access lock can be canceled with each password. For details, refer
to “Canceling an access lock (“Unlock” parameter)” on page 11-66.
For details on the password rules, refer to “Password rules” on
page 11-70.
11-58
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
2
Note
If bit 6 is set to “1”, the scanning and printing speed may be reduced.
Specify whether or not [User List] appears in the screen for machine authentication and specify the screen that appears as a default when [User List] is
touched.
Bit
76543210
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Utility mode
Settings at time of purchase
Specifying the setting
The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
7, 6, 5, 4, 3
-----------------------
00000
*
Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
2, 1
Specifies whether or
not the user list is displayed and whether
or not the user list is
the default.
00
Does not display the
user list.
01
Displays the user list,
but does not specify it
as the default.
11
Specifies the user list
as the default.
0
*Do not change this
bit when specitying
settings for this function.
0
-----------------------
Specifying the deleting method for [Del.] in input screens (mode 478)
Specify the deleting method for [Del.] in input screens.
Select whether the character at the cursor’s position or the character to the
left of the cursor is deleted.
Settings at time of purchase
Bit
76543210
Setting
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 80)
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 11
Specifying the setting for displaying a list of users in the User Authentication screen (mode 471)
11-59
Utility mode
11
Specifying the setting
Chapter 11
The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
7
Specify the deleting
method for [Del.] in input screens.
0
Deletes the character
at the cursor’s position
1
Deletes the character
to the left of the cursor
0000000
*Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
----------------------
Utility mode
Specifying settings for limiting user authentication to only Scan functions (mode 479)
Specify whether or not user authentication is performed only when the [Fax/
Scan] or [Extra Scan] key is pressed.
Settings at time of purchase
Bit
76543210
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying the setting
The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase.
11-60
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
7, 6, 5
----------------------
000
*Do not change these
bits when specifying
settings for this function.
4, 3, 2, 1, 0
Specifies whether or
not to limit authentication on Fax and
Scan functions.
11001
Limited
00000
Not limited
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
2
Reminder
Do not specify settings for mode 479 other than those described in
“Specifying the setting”.
!
Utility mode
If user authentication is limited to Scan functions, touch [Account/User
Auth.] in the Administrator Management 1 screen, and then select “External Server” as the user authentication method. For details on the user authentication method, refer to “Specifying the account/authentication
settings (User Authentication ON/OFF parameters)” on page 11-27.
Chapter 11
Detail
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-61
Utility mode
11
11.11 Specifying security settings (Security Setting parameters)
When the “Enhance Security” parameter of “Security Setting” is applied on
this machine, various security functions are forcibly set in order to prevent
unauthorized use of this machine and increase security when managing
saved data. Restrictions are applied to user operations, and box operations
and print jobs are limited.
Chapter 11
There are various settings that must first be specified or are forcibly set in order for “Enhance Security” to be set to “ON”. Before setting “Enhance Security” to “ON”, check the settings for the security functions.
2
Reminder
Utility mode
Before specifying encryption settings, disconnect network cables other
than the telephone cable from the machine.
If there are settings that are incompatible with “Enhance Security”, “Enhance Security” cannot be set to “ON”.
2
Note
The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed
after “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”.
Before specifying the “Enhance Security” parameter
The following settings must first be specified in order to set “Enhance Security” to “ON”.
11-62
Administrator Management screen
Settings
Admin. Set—Administrator Code Input
Specify a password that meets the password rules.
If the specified password does not meet the password rules, “Enhance Security” can be set to “ON”;
however, the password will be invalid when it is entered in the Administrator Management screen.
HDD Management—HDD Lock Setting
If the optional hard disk drive is installed, a 20-digit
hard disk locking password will be specified.
Encryption Setting
If security kit SC-504 is installed, encryption is specified. Either a locking password or encryption must
be specified.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
2
Note
!
Detail
For details on the password rules, refer to “Password rules” on
page 11-70.
To cancel encryption settings, set “Enhance Security” to “OFF”, erase all
data from the memory, and then turn the machine off, then on again with
the main power switch to initialize it. For details on managing the hard
disk, refer to the User’s Guide [Box Operations].
Parameters that are changed when “Enhance Security” is set
When “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”, settings for the following parameters are forcibly changed in order to enhance security. The changed parameters do not return to their original settings, even after “Enhance Security” is
canceled. Before setting “Enhance Security” to “ON”, carefully check the parameters that are to be changed.
Changed parameters
Details of change
Password rules
Password rules are applied.
Access locks
This parameter is enabled. If the password for an operation requiring a password is incorrectly entered three consecutive
times, the password can no longer be entered.
Software SW
The software switch settings cannot be changed.
Button display in the User Authentication screen
[User List] does not appear.
Allow Print without Authentication
This parameter cannot be used.
Auto Reset
This parameter cannot be set to “OFF”.
If this parameter is set to “OFF” before “Enhance Security” is
set to “ON”, this parameter will change to “1 min.”
Restrict One Touch Editing
“Restrict One Touch Editing” is set to “ON”.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-63
Utility mode
Certain conditions must be met, for example, an SSL certificate must be
registered, service codes must be changed and CS remote care must be
canceled, in order for the enhanced security features to be applied. For
details on registering an SSL certificate, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. For details on changing service codes and
canceling CS remote care, contact your technical representative.
Chapter 11
“HDD Management” appears in the Administrator Management screen
only when the optional hard disk drive is installed.
Utility mode
11
Changed parameters
Details of change
Temporary overwrite data
“Temporary overwrite data” is set to “ON”.
Cancel HDD Locking Password
The hard disk locking password setting can no longer be
changed.
!
Detail
Chapter 11
For details on the password rules, refer to “Password rules” on
page 11-70.
For details on the access locks, refer to “Canceling an access lock (“Unlock” parameter)” on page 11-66.
Utility mode
For details on the changed network settings, refer to the User’s Guide
[Network Scanner Operations].
For details on the changed box settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Box
Operations].
For details on the changed fax settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Facsimile Operations].
2
Note
The following software cannot be used when the enhanced security features are applied.
HDD Backup Utility
HDD Twain
Box Operator
Data Administrator
Specifying the “Enhance Security” parameter
Settings can be specified to enhance security for using the machine.
0 In order to set “Enhance Security” to “ON”, various conditions concerning the settings must be met. For details, refer to “Before specifying the
“Enhance Security” parameter” on page 11-62.
1
Display the Admin. 2 screen, and then touch [Security Setting].
–
For details on displaying the Admin. 2 screen, refer to “Displaying
the Administrator Management screen” on page 11-21.
The Security Setting screen appears.
11-64
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
2
11
Touch [Enhance Security].
Touch [ON], and then
touch [Enter].
–
If the conditions for
setting “Enhance Security” to “ON” have
not been met, a message appears, indicating why the
“Enhance Security”
parameter cannot be
used. In that case,
follow the instructions provided in the message so that the “Enhance Security” parameter can be used.
The message “To enable the Encryption setting turn off the power
switch and after a while turn it on. Please format HDD after turning on
the power switch.” appears.
4
Turn the machine off with the main power switch, and then wait about
10 seconds before turning it on again.
–
The “Enhance Security” parameter should be turned off by the administrator. Select “OFF” in the Enhance Security screen, touch
[Enter], and then perform the operation described in step 4.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-65
Utility mode
3
Chapter 11
The Enhance Security
screen appears.
Utility mode
11
!
Detail
When “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”, a password that does not meet
the password rules cannot be used. For details, refer to “Password rules”
on page 11-70.
Chapter 11
When “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”, the software switch settings
cannot be changed. In addition, the parameters that are changed when
“Enhance Security” is set to “ON” do not return to their original settings,
even after “Enhance Security” is set to “OFF”.
Canceling an access lock (“Unlock” parameter)
Utility mode
Operations that the access lock is applied to are locked so that the password
cannot be entered after it has been incorrectly entered three consecutive
times. Restart the machine or, if the penalty is canceled, the password is no
longer authenticated.
By canceling the penalty, certain operations are set so that the access lock
does not apply to them and they can be unlocked.
The access lock applies to the following passwords. However, the administrator password cannot be set so that the access lock does not apply to it.
passwords for confidential documents, box passwords, user authentication
passwords, print management passwords, bulletin board F-code passwords, confidential box F-code passwords, and the administrator password
!
Detail
As a default, the access lock is disabled.
The software switch settings can be used to enable the access lock. For
details on the software switch settings, refer to “Specifying software
switch settings (machine functions)” on page 11-50.
Even if the access lock was disabled with the software switch settings, it
is enabled when “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”.
To cancel an access lock
1
Display the Admin. 2 screen, and then touch [Security Setting].
–
For details on displaying the Admin. 2 screen, refer to “Displaying
the Administrator Management screen” on page 11-21.
The Security Setting screen appears.
11-66
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
2
11
Touch [Unlock].
Select the button for the
operation to be set so
that the access lock is
no longer applied, and
then touch [Enter].
Utility mode
3
Chapter 11
The Unlock screen appears.
–
If no options corresponding to the buttons are installed, no
buttons appear. If
users are not registered, [User Authentication] does not
appear.
The Security Setting screen appears again.
2
Note
If the password is not authenticated, even after the operation has been
set so that the access lock is no longer applied, restart the machine.
The access lock can be canceled by turning the machine off, then on
again with the main power switch.
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being
turned off.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-67
Utility mode
11
11.12 Managing the memory (Memory Management parameters)
Data stored on the internal memory can be erased, and all programmed and
specified settings can be set to their defaults.
2
Reminder
Chapter 11
Before managing the memory, disconnect network cables other than the
telephone cable from the machine.
Utility mode
If the “Overwrite All Data” parameter on the Memory Management screen
is selected, all programmed and specified settings are reset to their defaults. Therefore, the machine may not operate correctly after all data is
overwritten. Overwrite all data when disposing of the machine. Do not
perform this operation in any other circumstances.
Wait at least two minutes after turning on the machine before deleting all
of the data.
Do not touch the machine while deleting all of the data in order to prevent
errors from occurring.
2
Note
The data on the memory cannot be erased while a job is being performed.
To erase all data from the internal memory
1
Display the Admin. 2 screen, and then touch [Memory Management].
–
For details on displaying the Admin. 2 screen, refer to “Displaying
the Administrator Management screen” on page 11-21.
– If the optional hard disk drive is installed, [HDD Management] appears instead of [Memory Management]. For details on the “HDD
Management” parameter, refer to the User’s Guide [Box Operations].
The Memory Management screen appears.
11-68
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
2
11
Touch [Overwrite All Data].
3
Chapter 11
The Overwrite All Data
screen appears.
Touch [Yes], and then
touch [Enter].
Utility mode
Wait until the message
“All data has been overwritten.” appears.
2
Note
If a job is being performed, the message “Cannot start because there is
an unfinished job.” appears. Touch [Enter] to return to the previous
screen, make sure that the job is completed, and then select the “Overwrite All Data” parameter again.
If the message “Failed to overwrite All Data. …” appears, turn the machine off with the main power switch, wait about 10 seconds before turning it on again, and then select the “Overwrite All Data” parameter again.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-69
Utility mode
11
11.13 Password rules
When “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”, the password rules are applied, and
the following limitations are applied to passwords in order to increase security.
Chapter 11
Passwords that have already been specified, but do not meet the password
rules when “Enhance Security” is set to “ON” are not accepted when they
are entered. In that case, the administrator should temporarily turn off “Enhance Security”, then specify the passwords according to the following conditions.
!
Detail
As a default, the password rules are disabled.
Utility mode
The software switch settings can be used to enable the password rules.
For details on the software switch settings, refer to “Specifying software
switch settings (machine functions)” on page 11-50.
Even if the password rules were disabled with the software switch settings, they are enabled when “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”.
Conditions of the password rules
Limitations on the number of
characters
Limitations on registering/changing
8 alphanumeric characters
• Only half-width characters can
be entered for the administrator
password.
• User authentication user passwords must contain 8 or more
characters.
The administrator access code for the administrator
password must meet the password rules.
A password that consists of the same letter or number
being repeated, such as “00000000”, cannot be registered.
Passwords that the password rules apply to
11-70
Password
Operations that use passwords
Administrator password
Used when specifying Administrator Management settings.
Account track password
Used when logging on after account track settings have
been specified.
Box password
For details on the box operations, refer to the User’s
Guide [Box Operations].
Confidential document password
For details on confidential document operations, refer to
the User’s Guide [Box Operations].
User authentication user password
Used when logging on after user authentication settings
have been specified.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Utility mode
11
!
Detail
Utility mode
Be sure that the administrator password that is specified is an administrator access code that meets the password rules. If Administrator mode
is entered using an administrator password that does not meet the password rules and enhanced security features are applied, it will no longer
be possible to enter Administrator mode. For details, contact your technical representative.
Chapter 11
When the password rules are applied, the characters that can be used
and the number of digits in each password are limited.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
11-71
Utility mode
Utility mode
Chapter 11
11
11-72
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Chapter 12
Appendix
Appendix
12
Appendix
12
12
Appendix
12.1
Entering text
This section contains details on using the keyboard that appears in the touch
panel for typing in passwords and text to register one-touch recipients. The
keypad can also be used to type in numbers.
The following procedure describes how to enter characters in the User Name
screen when registering users for user authentication.
Chapter 12
To type text
Appendix
%
12-2
In the keyboard that appeared, touch the button
for the desired character.
– Numbers can also be
typed in with the keypad.
– To type in uppercase
letters, touch [Caps].
– To cancel Caps
mode, touch [Caps]
again.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Appendix
12
2
Note
To cancel the entered text, touch [Cancel].
To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key.
!
Detail
The software switch settings can be used to change how characters are
deleted. For details on the software switch settings, refer to “Specifying
software switch settings (machine functions)” on page 11-50.
If the number of characters exceeds the limit allowed, the last character
is replaced with the last character entered.
List of available characters
Alphanumeric
characters /
symbols
(Space)
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
12-3
Appendix
To change a character in the entered text, touch
and
to move
the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Del.], and then type in
the desired letter or number.
Chapter 12
To switch between entering letters or symbols, touch the button for
switching the input mode.
Appendix
12
Appendix
Chapter 12
12.2
12-4
Glossary
Term
Definition
Simplex/Duplex
Select the setting to specify if the scanned document and the printed
copy are printed on just one side or both sides.
Access lock
Operations that the access lock is applied to are locked so that the
password cannot be entered after it has been incorrectly entered
three consecutive times.
Accessibility
Specify these settings to set up and adjust the control panel and
touch panel.
Account Track
Set this function to group users into accounts and manage their use
of the machine (printing and scanning counts and number of prints).
ADF
Reverse automatic document feeder; Can be used to automatically
scan the document
AMS
Auto Magnification Select; “Auto Zoom” setting
APS
“Auto Paper Select” setting
ATS
Automatic paper-tray-switching feature (ATS = Auto tray switch)
Automatic paper-trayswitching feature
If a paper tray runs out of paper while copies are being printed and
the same size of paper is detected in a different paper tray, that paper tray is selected so that copying can continue.
Automatic panel reset
The machine automatically performs this operation to return all settings to their defaults if no operation is performed for the specified
length of time.
Auto Paper Select
Select this setting to detect the document placed on the original
glass or loaded into the ADF, then automatically select paper of the
same size if “×1.0” is selected or select the paper size appropriate
for the specified zoom ratio.
Auto Zoom
Select this setting to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio
after a document is placed on the original glass or loaded into the
ADF and the copy paper size is selected.
B/W Reverse
Set this function to copy the document with the light- and darkcolored areas or the gradations of the image inversed.
Center Erase
Select this setting to print copies with the center (fold) of the document erased.
Change Tray Settings
Touch this button to specify a paper size not loaded in a paper tray
or to copy on paper other than plain paper.
Chapters
Set this function to specify chapter title pages that must be printed
on the front side of the paper when printing double-sided copies.
Combine Originals
Select a setting to arrange reduced copies of multiple document
pages on a single copy page. The settings for the number of pages
that can be combined are “2 in 1”, “4 in 1” and “8 in 1”.
Cover Mode
Set this function to add paper from the specified paper tray to the
copies as a cover page.
Density
Select a setting to adjust the density of the print image to one of nine
levels.
Edge/Frame Erase
Set this function to erase unwanted areas from the document, such
as the shadows around the edges and the fold.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Appendix
Definition
Enhance Security
The various enhanced security features for preventing unauthorized
use of this machine and for increasing security when managing
saved data.
Enlarge Display
In this mode, the screens are displayed larger for easier operation.
Erase
Set this function to erase the unwanted parts of the document image.
Finisher
This unit sorts and finishes copies that have been fed out.
Fold & Staple
Set this function to fold the copies in half and staple them together
at the center.
Folding
Select the folding setting to specify how copies are folded. Depending on the finisher and other options that are installed, the “Crease”
and “Center Binding” settings are available.
Group
Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in the document. The specified number of copies of the second page is printed
after all copies of the first page are finished.
Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out.
Image Repeat
Set this function to repeatedly print the image scanned from the document to fill the entire page
Image Settings
Set the appropriate function to make copies with the desired image
added.
Set the “Set Numbering” function to print copies with a distribution
number in the background.
Set the “Stamp” function to print copies with one of the preset
stamps, such as “TOP SECRET”, “COPY” or “PROOF”.
Set the “Image Overlay” function to print copies overlapping a different scanned image.
Insert Image
Set this function to later scan multiple images from the original glass
and insert them at the desired locations in a document scanned with
the ADF, then feed out all copies together.
Insert Sheet
Set this function to insert paper from the specified paper tray into the
copies as chapter title pages.
Job
The copy operation that is queued on the machine while copying;
Multiple jobs can be queued on the machine.
LCT
Optional paper feed cabinet that can be loaded with up to 2,500
sheets of paper.
Low Power Mode
The machine automatically enters this mode, where it conserves energy, if no operation is performed for the specified length of time. In
this mode, the touch panel go off.
Margin
Select the setting for the position of the binding margin for the loaded document. Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy
from being printed upside-down when making double-sided copies
from single-sided documents or when making single-sided copies
from double-sided documents.
Memory Scan
Scans a document exceeding the maximum 80 pages that can be
loaded into the ADF by scanning the document in separate batches.
The document can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In
addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original
glass and the ADF during the scanning operation.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
12-5
Appendix
Term
Chapter 12
12
Appendix
Appendix
Chapter 12
12
12-6
Term
Definition
Minimal
Select this setting to produce a copy with the original image slightly
reduced.
Mixed Original
Select this setting to detect the size of each document page and
print a copy on paper of the appropriate size when a document with
different page sizes is loaded together into the ADF.
Offset
Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out.
OHP Interleave
Set this function to insert paper between overhead projector transparencies that are being copied.
This prevents overhead projector transparencies from sticking together.
Paper
Select settings for the type and size of paper to be printed on.
Password rules
Strict conditions for limiting passwords, for example, passwords
consisting of the same character repeated cannot be specified and
passwords must contain 8 or more characters.
Proof Copy
Press this key to print a single sample copy and stop the machine so
that it can be checked before printing a large number of copies. This
prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies.
Punch
Select the setting to punch holes in the copies for filing.
Quality
Select the setting for the image type of the document to better adjust
the copy quality.
Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert
Select from the functions that are available to edit copies as desired.
Sleep Mode
The machine automatically enters this mode, where it conserves energy, if no operation is performed for the specified length of time.
The machine conserves more energy in this mode than in Low Power
mode.
Sort
Select this setting to separate each set of the copies. The second
copy set is printed after all of the first copy set is finished.
User Authentication
Set this function to manage individual users access to the machine.
With machine authentication, the number of prints and scans are
counted for each user. With external server authentication, limitations can be placed on user access.
XY Zoom
Touch this button to use the keypad to specify the zoom ratio for
producing an enlarged/reduced copy of the loaded document.
Zoom
Specify the zoom ratio of the copy.
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Appendix
Symbols
[Power] (auxiliary power key) ......... 2-22
×1.0 setting .................................... 3-29
Numerics
1st tray ........................................... 2-54
C
Call technical representative ............ 5-2
Center binding ............................... 3-52
Cleaning ......................................... 10-2
Combine originals settings
.............................................. 3-46, 3-49
Contrast ............................... 3-43, 3-45
2 in 1 .............................................. 3-47
Control panel ....................... 2-14, 2-20
2 staples setting ............................ 3-52
Copy programs ................................ 4-8
2nd tray .......................................... 2-54
Corner staple setting ..................... 3-52
4 in 1 .............................................. 3-48
Counters ........................................ 10-6
Cover mode function ....................... 8-2
A
Access lock ................................. 11-57
D
Accessibility ................................... 4-14
Default settings ............................ 11-23
Account data ............................... 11-31
Document feeding ........................... 3-8
Account track ........ 2-37, 11-27, 11-31
Document orientation .................... x-27
Aceess lock ................................. 11-66
Documents ..................................... 7-17
ADF ........................................ 3-8, 7-17
Double-sided copies ...................... 3-41
Admin. set. ................................... 11-25
E
Administrator management ......... 11-21
Edge/Frame erase function ........... 8-13
Authentication ...................... 2-30, 2-50
Energy star ....................................... x-1
Authentication form ..................... 11-27
Enhance security ............. 11-57, 11-62
Auto paper select setting ............... 3-24
Enlarge display .............................. 2-19
Auto zoom setting .......................... 3-27
Enlarge/Reduce settings ................ 3-32
Automatic duplex unit ...................... 6-4
Automatic panel reset .................... 2-27
External server authentication
............................................ 2-33, 11-38
Automatic paper-tray-switching
feature .............................................. 7-7
F
B
Finisher FS-530 ...................... 2-12, 6-7
Finishing settings ........................... 3-50
B/W reverse setting ....................... 8-35
Basics screen ................................ 2-17
G
Book copy function ....................... 8-18
Group setting ....................... 3-51, 3-54
Booklet function ............................. 8-22
H
Bypass tray .................................... 2-60
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Hole-punch setting ........................ 3-57
12-7
Chapter 12
Index
Appendix
12.3
12
Appendix
12
I
Options ............................................ 2-2
Icons .............................................. 2-18
Original direction settings .............. 3-19
Image overlay function .................. 8-28
Original glass ....................... 3-10, 7-19
Image repeat function .................... 8-15
Output tray OT-602 ............... 2-12, 6-8
Image settings functions ............... 8-24
P
Individual zoom settings ................ 3-34
Paper ......................... 2-54, 2-57, 2-60
Chapter 12
Insert sheet function ........................ 8-5
Paper feed cabinet PC-108 ... 2-10, 6-5
J
Paper feed cabinet PC-206 ... 2-10, 6-6
Job list ........................................... 4-21
Paper feed cabinet PC-407 ... 2-10, 6-6
Job separator JS-502 ...................... 6-9
Paper misfeed .......................... 5-4, 5-5
Paper settings .................................. 7-8
L
Paper sizes ...................................... 7-2
Labels
Caution notations and labels ... 1-16
Paper storage .................................. 7-6
LCD back-light off ......................... 2-29
Appendix
Paper capacity ................................. 7-4
Interrupt ........................................... 4-7
LCT ................................................ 2-57
Legal restrictions on copying ........ x-29
Low power mode ........................... 2-28
Paper types ..................................... 7-4
Part names ...................................... 2-2
Password rule ...... 11-57, 11-62, 11-70
Periodic maintenance .................... 10-7
Power source ................................. 1-18
M
Programs ......................................... 4-8
Machine authentication
.................................. 2-30, 2-50, 11-38
Punch unit PU-501 ................ 2-12, 6-8
Mailbin kit MT-502 ................. 2-11, 6-9
Punch waste container .................. 9-24
Main power switch ........................ 2-22
Punched holes ............................... 3-52
Margin settings .................... 3-21, 8-11
Memory management ................. 11-68
Messages ...................................... 5-34
Minimal setting .............................. 3-30
Proof copy ....................................... 4-5
Q
Quality ............................................ 3-43
Queuing copy jobs ......................... 3-61
Mixed original setting .................... 3-16
R
Mode memory ................................. 4-8
Replacing staple cartridge ............... 9-7
N
Non-sort setting ............................. 3-50
O
OHP interleave function ................... 8-8
Operating environment .................. 1-18
12-8
Replacing toner bottle ............. 9-2, 9-4
Reverse automatic document feeder
DF-620 ..................................... 2-9, 6-4
S
Saddle stitcher SD-507 ......... 2-11, 6-8
Safety information ........................... 1-2
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Appendix
12
Separate scan setting .......... 3-12, 8-36
Set numbering function ................. 8-24
Set zoom ........................................ 3-37
Settings ............................................ 4-2
Simplex/duplex .............................. 3-39
Single-sided copies ....................... 3-40
Sleep .............................................. 2-28
Software switch settings ............. 11-50
Sort setting .......................... 3-51, 3-53
Space requirements ...................... 1-17
Special paper ......................... 7-5, 7-15
Chapter 12
Stamp function .............................. 8-24
Staple jam ...................................... 9-15
Stapling ................................ 3-52, 3-55
T
Appendix
Troubleshooting ............................. 5-30
U
User authentication .......... 11-27, 11-38
User choice settings ...................... 11-9
User management settings .......... 11-19
Utility mode .................................... 11-2
W
Warm up ........................................ 2-24
Z
Zoom settings ................................ 3-27
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
12-9
Appendix
Appendix
Chapter 12
12
12-10
VarioLink 2221/2821/3621
Beyond the Ordinary
Printing for
Professionals
Download PDF

advertising